Softx3000 Hardware Description Manual 2d6u5g
This document was ed by and they confirmed that they have the permission to share it. If you are author or own the copyright of this book, please report to us by using this report form. Report 3i3n4
Overview 26281t
& View Softx3000 Hardware Description Manual as PDF for free.
More details 6y5l6z
- Words: 28,093
- Pages: 148
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components................................................
1-1
1.1 Introduction to the Chapter ..................................................................... 1.2 Appearance and Features of Cabinet .................................................... 1.2.1 Cabinet Appearance ...................................................................... 1.2.2 Cabinet Architecture ...................................................................... 1.2.3 N800 and Accessories ..................................................... 1.2.4 Technical Specifications of N68-22 Cabinet .................................. 1.3 Classification of Cabinets ....................................................................... 1.3.1 Overview of Cabinet Classification ................................................ 1.3.2 Integrated Configuration Cabinet ................................................... 1.3.3 Service Processing Cabinet ........................................................... 1.3.4 MRS Cabinet .................................................................................. 1.3.5 Cabinet of SoftX3000 and SG7000................................................ 1.3.6 Cabinet of VIG8920 - SoftX3000 and UMG8900 ........................... 1.4 Typical Configurations of Cabinet .......................................................... 1.4.1 Overview of Cabinet Typical Configurations .................................. 1.4.2 Embedded-MRS Mode .................................................................. 1.4.3 Separate-MRS Mode ..................................................................... 1.5 Power Distribution Frame ....................................................................... 1.5.1 Functions of Power Distribution Frame .......................................... 1.5.2 Appearance of Power Distribution Frame ...................................... 1.5.3 Front View of Power Distribution Frame ........................................ 1.5.4 Rear View of Power Distribution Frame ......................................... 1.5.5 Technical Specifications of Power Distribution Frame ................... 1.6 Air Deflector ............................................................................................ 1.6.1 Functions of Air Deflector............................................................... 1.6.2 Appearance of Air Deflector ........................................................... 1.7 KVMS ..................................................................................................... 1.7.1 Functions of KVMS ........................................................................ 1.7.2 Appearance of KVMS .................................................................... 1.7.3 Technical Specifications of KVMS ................................................. 1.8 LAN Switch ............................................................................................. 1.8.1 Functions of LAN Switch ................................................................ 1.8.2 Front View of LAN Switch .............................................................. 1.8.3 Rear View of LAN Switch ............................................................... 1.8.4 Technical Specifications of LAN Switch ......................................... 1.9 Cabling Trough ....................................................................................... 1.9.1 Functions of Cabling Trough .......................................................... 1.9.2 Appearance and Architecture of Cabling Trough ........................... 1.10 IBM EXP400 Hard Disk Array ..............................................................
1-1 1-1 1-1 1-2 1-4 1-6 1-7 1-7 1-7 1-11 1-13 1-16 1-19 1-22 1-22 1-22 1-23 1-26 1-26 1-27 1-28 1-30 1-31 1-33 1-33 1-34 1-34 1-34 1-34 1-35 1-36 1-36 1-37 1-38 1-38 1-39 1-39 1-39 1-40
1.10.1 Overview of Hard Disk Array ........................................................ 1.10.2 Appearance of Hard Disk Array ................................................... 1.10.3 Front View of Hard Disk Array ..................................................... 1.10.4 Rear View of Hard Disk Array ...................................................... 1.10.5 Technical Specifications of Hard Disk Array ................................ 1.11 BAM and iGWB Server (HP Server) ..................................................... 1.11.1 Functions of BAM and iGWB Server (HP Server)........................ 1.11.2 View of iGWB Server ................................................................... 1.11.3 Technical Specifications of BAM and iGWB Server..................... 1.12 BAM and iGWB Server (IBM Server) ................................................... 1.12.1 Functions of BAM and iGWB Server ............................................ 1.12.2 Front View of BAM and iGWB Server .......................................... 1.12.3 Rear View of BAM and iGWB Server ........................................... 1.12.4 Technical Specifications of BAM and iGWB Server..................... 1.13 Workstation .......................................................................................... 1.13.1 Functions of Workstation ............................................................. 1.13.2 Technical Specifications of Workstation ...................................... 1.14 Universal Alarm Box .............................................................................
1-40 1-40 1-41 1-42 1-43 1-44 1-44 1-44 1-46 1-47 1-47 1-47 1-48 1-49 1-50 1-50 1-50 1-51
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame ...................................................................................
2-1
2.1 Introduction to the Chapter ..................................................................... 2.2 Overview of OSTA Frame ...................................................................... 2.3 Features of OSTA Frame ....................................................................... 2.4 Board Allocation of OSTA Frame ........................................................... 2.5 Fan Box .................................................................................................. 2.5.1 Overview of Fan Box ...................................................................... 2.5.2 Functions of Fan Box ..................................................................... 2.5.3 Front View of Fan Box ................................................................... 2.5.4 Technical Specifications of Fan Box .............................................. 2.6 Classification of Frames ......................................................................... 2.6.1 Overview of Frame Classification .................................................. 2.6.2 Basic Frame 0 ................................................................................ 2.6.3 Basic Frame 1 ................................................................................ 2.6.4 Expansion Frame ........................................................................... 2.6.5 Media Resource Frame .................................................................
2-1 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-8 2-10
Chapter 3 Boards .............................................................................................
3-1
3.1 Classification of Boards .......................................................................... 3.2 ALUI ....................................................................................................... 3.2.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 3.2.2 Technical Specifications ................................................................
3-1 3-3 3-3 3-3
3.2.3 Indicators ....................................................................................... 3.2.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................ 3.3 BFII ......................................................................................................... 3.3.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 3.3.2 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 3.3.3 Indicators ....................................................................................... 3.3.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................ 3.4 BSGI ....................................................................................................... 3.4.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 3.4.2 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 3.4.3 Indicators ....................................................................................... 3.4.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................ 3.5 CDBI ....................................................................................................... 3.5.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 3.5.2 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 3.5.3 Indicators ....................................................................................... 3.5.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................ 3.6 CKII ........................................................................................................ 3.6.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 3.6.2 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 3.6.3 Indicators ....................................................................................... 3.6.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................ 3.7 EPII......................................................................................................... 3.7.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 3.7.2 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 3.7.3 Indicators ....................................................................................... 3.7.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................ 3.8 FCCU ..................................................................................................... 3.8.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 3.8.2 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 3.8.3 Indicators ....................................................................................... 3.8.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................ 3.9 FCSU...................................................................................................... 3.9.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 3.9.2 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 3.9.3 Indicators ....................................................................................... 3.9.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................ 3.10 HSCI ..................................................................................................... 3.10.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 3.10.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 3.10.3 Indicators .....................................................................................
3-4 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-7 3-7 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-17 3-17 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-26
3.10.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers .......................................................... 3.11 IFMI ...................................................................................................... 3.11.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 3.11.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 3.11.3 Indicators ..................................................................................... 3.11.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers .......................................................... 3.12 SIUI ...................................................................................................... 3.12.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 3.12.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 3.12.3 Indicators ..................................................................................... 3.12.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers .......................................................... 3.13 SMUI .................................................................................................... 3.13.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 3.13.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 3.13.3 Indicators ..................................................................................... 3.13.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers .......................................................... 3.14 MRCA ................................................................................................... 3.14.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 3.14.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 3.14.3 Indicators ..................................................................................... 3.14.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers .......................................................... 3.15 MRIA .................................................................................................... 3.15.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 3.15.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 3.15.3 Indicators ..................................................................................... 3.15.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers .......................................................... 3.16 MSGI .................................................................................................... 3.16.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 3.16.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 3.16.3 Indicators ..................................................................................... 3.16.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers .......................................................... 3.17 UPWR .................................................................................................. 3.17.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 3.17.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 3.17.3 Indicators ..................................................................................... 3.17.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ..........................................................
3-27 3-27 3-27 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-30 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-34 3-34 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-36 3-36 3-36 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-40 3-40 3-40 3-41 3-42
Chapter 4 Cables .............................................................................................
4-1
4.1 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable ...................................... 4.1.1 Input Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for Cabinet ....................................................................................................
4-1 4-1
4.1.2 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cables for Service Frame...................................................................................................... 4.1.3 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for KVMS Switcher .................................................................................................. 4.1.4 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for LAN Switch ..... 4.1.5 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for HP Server ....... 4.1.6 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for IBM Server ...... 4.1.7 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for Hard Disk Array ....................................................................................................... 4.1.8 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for MRS ................ 4.1.9 Other Protection Grounding Cables ............................................... 4.2 Internal Signal Cable .............................................................................. 4.2.1 Straight Through Cable .................................................................. 4.2.2 Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers (HP Server) ................. 4.2.3 Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers (IBM Server) ................ 4.2.4 Data Cable Between iGWB Server and Hard Disk Array............... 4.2.5 Server/Switcher Cable ................................................................... 4.2.6 Serial Port Cable for Monitoring Power Distribution Frame ........... 4.2.7 Internal Clock Cable ....................................................................... 4.3 External Signal Cable ............................................................................. 4.3.1 Trunk Cable between SoftX3000 and Digital Distribution Frame... 4.3.2 Clock Signal Cable between SoftX3000 and BITS Device ............ 4.3.3 External Network Cables of SoftX3000..........................................
4-6 4-7 4-7 4-8 4-8 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-15 4-20 4-20
Appendix A Appendix .....................................................................................
A-1
Index .................................................................................................................
4-3 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-5
HUAWEI
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Hardware Description Manual V300R003
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Hardware Description Manual Manual Version
T2-012532-20050331-C-3.30
Product Version
V300R003
BOM
31250332
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical and service. Please feel free to our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address: istration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd., Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China Postal Code: 518129 Website: http://www.huawei.com Email: [email protected]
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Copyright © 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET,
, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,
TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800, TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN, HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye, Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, and TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
About This Manual Release Notes This manual applies to U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System V300R003.
Related Manuals The related manuals are listed in the following table. Manual
Content
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-System Description
It provides an overall introduction to the SoftX3000, including product features, applications, and technical specifications.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-System Principle
It details on the hardware architecture, component interworking mechanism, and subsystems of alarm, billing, and clock in the SoftX3000.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Hardware Description Manual
It details the features and technical specifications of the hardware components of the SoftX3000, including cabinets, frames, boards, cables, and cabinet internal components.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Service and Features Manual
It covers various services and functions ed by the SoftX3000, including voice services, supplementary services, IP Centrex services, multi-media services, value added services, dual homing functions, charging functions, IPTN functions, remote network access functions, and so on.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Hardware Installation Manual
It details the installation procedure of the SoftX3000 hardware components, and matters needing attention during the installation process.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Software Installation Manual
It covers the detailed procedure of installing the SoftX3000 software, including BAM server, emergency workstation, and client, focusing on the key points that might cause installation failure.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Routine Maintenance Guide
It guides the maintenance engineers to perform daily maintenance, monthly maintenance, and yearly maintenance tasks on the SoftX3000.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Manual
Content
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Emergency Maintenance Manual
It guides the maintenance engineers to perform recovery operations in the case of emergencies, such as congestion of global service, AMG, and TMG, and failure of host and BAM.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Part Replacement Guide
It guides the maintenance engineers on how to replace hardware components of the SoftX3000, such as boards, fan frame, LAN Switch, and hard disk.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Operation Manual-Configuration Guide
It guides the engineers how to configure various data in the SoftX3000, including configuration steps, preparations, database table referencing relationships, and command parameters.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Operation Manual-Configuration Examples
It guides the engineers how to configure various data in the SoftX3000, including networking example, configuration script, key parameters and debugging guidance.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Operation Manual-Traffic Measurement
It guides the engineers how to perform traffic measurement operations and how to analyze traffic measurement results.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Operation Manual-GUI Guide
It guides the engineers how to use the GUI on various clients of the SoftX3000, including operations on menus and navigation tree. In addition, it introduces the operations on TableBrowse.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System BAM Manual
It guides the engineers how to install and use the software related to the BAM, including remote maintenance software, anti-virus software, system customized software, and so on.
U-SYS iGateway Bill Manual
It elaborates on the functioning principle of the iGateway Bill. Also, it teaches you on how to install, maintain, and operate the product.
Organization The manual details the installation procedures of SoftX3000 software and key points to be cautious about. The manual contains four chapters and an appendix. z
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components details the classification and features of SoftX3000 cabinets, and the functions and technical specifications of internal components used in the cabinets.
z
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame is a reference of OSTA frame features, classifications, and technical specifications. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Chapter 3 Boards features the functions and technical specifications of all
z
boards used in SoftX3000. The chapter also details the indicators, jumpers, and DIP switches of each type of board. Chapter 4 Cables describes the different types of cables used in SoftX3000
z
cabinets. Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations lists the acronyms and
z
abbreviations used in the manual..
Intended Audience The manual is intended for the following readers: z
NGN engineering specialist
z
NGN operation & maintenance personnel
z
NGN network planning experts
Conventions The manual uses the following conventions:
I. General conventions Convention
Description
Arial
Normal paragraphs are in Arial.
Boldface
Headings are in Boldface.
Courier New
Terminal Display is in Courier New.
II. Command conventions Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in Boldface.
italic
Command arguments are in italic.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.
{ x | y | ... } *
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Convention
Description Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars. Many or none can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ] *
III. GUI conventions Convention
Description
<>
Button names are inside angle brackets. For example, click the
button.
[]
Window names, menu items, data table and field names are inside square brackets. For example, pop up the [New ] window.
/
Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example, [File/Create/Folder].
IV. Keyboard operation Format
Description
Press the key with the key name inside angle brackets. For example, <Enter>,
,
, or
.
Press the keys concurrently. For example,
means the three keys should be pressed concurrently.
Press the keys in turn. For example,
means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
V. Mouse operation Action
Description
Click
Press the left button or right button quickly (left button by default).
Double Click
Press the left button twice continuously and quickly.
Drag
Press and hold the left button and drag it to a certain position.
VI. Symbols Eye-catching symbols are also used in the manual to highlight the points worthy of special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Caution, Warning, Danger: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.
Note, Comment, Tip, Knowhow, Thought: Means a complementary
description.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Table of Contents
Table of Contents Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components ............................................................................. 1-1 1.1 Introduction to the Chapter ................................................................................................ 1-1 1.2 Appearance and Features of Cabinet................................................................................ 1-1 1.2.1 Cabinet Appearance ............................................................................................... 1-1 1.2.2 Cabinet Architecture................................................................................................ 1-2 1.2.3 N800 and Accessories............................................................................... 1-4 1.2.4 Technical Specifications of N68-22 Cabinet ........................................................... 1-6 1.3 Classification of Cabinets .................................................................................................. 1-7 1.3.1 Overview of Cabinet Classification.......................................................................... 1-7 1.3.2 Integrated Configuration Cabinet ............................................................................ 1-7 1.3.3 Service Processing Cabinet .................................................................................. 1-11 1.3.4 MRS Cabinet ......................................................................................................... 1-13 1.3.5 Cabinet of SoftX3000 and SG7000....................................................................... 1-16 1.3.6 Cabinet of VIG8920—SoftX3000 and UMG8900.................................................. 1-19 1.4 Typical Configurations of Cabinet.................................................................................... 1-22 1.4.1 Overview of Cabinet Typical Configurations ......................................................... 1-22 1.4.2 Embedded-MRS Mode.......................................................................................... 1-22 1.4.3 Separate-MRS Mode ............................................................................................ 1-23 1.5 Power Distribution Frame ................................................................................................ 1-26 1.5.1 Functions of Power Distribution Frame................................................................. 1-26 1.5.2 Appearance of Power Distribution Frame ............................................................. 1-27 1.5.3 Front View of Power Distribution Frame ............................................................... 1-28 1.5.4 Rear View of Power Distribution Frame................................................................ 1-30 1.5.5 Technical Specifications of Power Distribution Frame.......................................... 1-31 1.6 Air Deflector ..................................................................................................................... 1-33 1.6.1 Functions of Air Deflector...................................................................................... 1-33 1.6.2 Appearance of Air Deflector .................................................................................. 1-34 1.7 KVMS............................................................................................................................... 1-34 1.7.1 Functions of KVMS ............................................................................................... 1-34 1.7.2 Appearance of KVMS............................................................................................ 1-34 1.7.3 Technical Specifications of KVMS ........................................................................ 1-35 1.8 LAN Switch ...................................................................................................................... 1-36 1.8.1 Functions of LAN Switch ....................................................................................... 1-36 1.8.2 Front View of LAN Switch ..................................................................................... 1-37 1.8.3 Rear View of LAN Switch ...................................................................................... 1-38 1.8.4 Technical Specifications of LAN Switch................................................................ 1-38 1.9 Cabling Trough ................................................................................................................ 1-39
Huawei Technologies Proprietary i
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Table of Contents
1.9.1 Functions of Cabling Trough ................................................................................. 1-39 1.9.2 Appearance and Architecture of Cabling Trough.................................................. 1-39 1.10 IBM EXP400 Hard Disk Array........................................................................................ 1-40 1.10.1 Overview of Hard Disk Array............................................................................... 1-40 1.10.2 Appearance of Hard Disk Array .......................................................................... 1-40 1.10.3 Front View of Hard Disk Array............................................................................. 1-41 1.10.4 Rear View of Hard Disk Array ............................................................................. 1-42 1.10.5 Technical Specifications of Hard Disk Array ....................................................... 1-43 1.11 BAM and iGWB Server (HP Server) .............................................................................. 1-44 1.11.1 Functions of BAM and iGWB Server (HP Server)............................................... 1-44 1.11.2 View of iGWB Server .......................................................................................... 1-44 1.11.3 Technical Specifications of BAM and iGWB Server............................................ 1-46 1.12 BAM and iGWB Server (IBM Server)............................................................................. 1-47 1.12.1 Functions of BAM and iGWB Server................................................................... 1-47 1.12.2 Front View of BAM and iGWB Server ................................................................. 1-47 1.12.3 Rear View of BAM and iGWB Server.................................................................. 1-48 1.12.4 Technical Specifications of BAM and iGWB Server............................................ 1-49 1.13 Workstation .................................................................................................................... 1-50 1.13.1 Functions of Workstation..................................................................................... 1-50 1.13.2 Technical Specifications of Workstation ............................................................. 1-50 1.14 Universal Alarm Box ...................................................................................................... 1-51 Chapter 2 OSTA Frame ................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1 Introduction to the Chapter ................................................................................................ 2-1 2.2 Overview of OSTA Frame.................................................................................................. 2-1 2.3 Features of OSTA Frame .................................................................................................. 2-1 2.4 Board Allocation of OSTA Frame ...................................................................................... 2-2 2.5 Fan Box.............................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.5.1 Overview of Fan Box............................................................................................... 2-3 2.5.2 Functions of Fan Box .............................................................................................. 2-3 2.5.3 Front View of Fan Box............................................................................................. 2-3 2.5.4 Technical Specifications of Fan Box ....................................................................... 2-4 2.6 Classification of Frames .................................................................................................... 2-4 2.6.1 Overview of Frame Classification............................................................................ 2-4 2.6.2 Basic Frame 0 ......................................................................................................... 2-5 2.6.3 Basic Frame 1 ......................................................................................................... 2-6 2.6.4 Expansion Frame .................................................................................................... 2-8 2.6.5 Media Resource Frame......................................................................................... 2-10 Chapter 3 Boards........................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 Classification of Boards ..................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 ALUI ................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.1 Functions................................................................................................................. 3-3 3.2.2 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 3-3 Huawei Technologies Proprietary ii
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Table of Contents
3.2.3 Indicators................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ..................................................................................... 3-6 3.3 BFII .................................................................................................................................... 3-6 3.3.1 Functions................................................................................................................. 3-6 3.3.2 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 3-6 3.3.3 Indicators................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.3.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ..................................................................................... 3-7 3.4 BSGI .................................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.4.1 Functions................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.4.2 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 3-8 3.4.3 Indicators................................................................................................................. 3-9 3.4.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-11 3.5 CDBI ................................................................................................................................ 3-11 3.5.1 Functions............................................................................................................... 3-11 3.5.2 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 3-11 3.5.3 Indicators............................................................................................................... 3-11 3.5.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-12 3.6 CKII .................................................................................................................................. 3-13 3.6.1 Functions............................................................................................................... 3-13 3.6.2 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 3-13 3.6.3 Indicators............................................................................................................... 3-13 3.6.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-15 3.7 EPII .................................................................................................................................. 3-15 3.7.1 Functions............................................................................................................... 3-15 3.7.2 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 3-15 3.7.3 Indicators............................................................................................................... 3-16 3.7.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-17 3.8 FCCU ............................................................................................................................... 3-17 3.8.1 Functions............................................................................................................... 3-17 3.8.2 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 3-19 3.8.3 Indicators............................................................................................................... 3-20 3.8.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-21 3.9 FCSU ............................................................................................................................... 3-21 3.9.1 Functions............................................................................................................... 3-21 3.9.2 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 3-22 3.9.3 Indicators............................................................................................................... 3-23 3.9.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-25 3.10 HSCI .............................................................................................................................. 3-25 3.10.1 Functions............................................................................................................. 3-25 3.10.2 Technical Specifications...................................................................................... 3-25 3.10.3 Indicators............................................................................................................. 3-26 3.10.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-27
Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Table of Contents
3.11 IFMI................................................................................................................................ 3-27 3.11.1 Functions............................................................................................................. 3-27 3.11.2 Technical Specifications...................................................................................... 3-27 3.11.3 Indicators............................................................................................................. 3-28 3.11.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-29 3.12 SIUI ................................................................................................................................ 3-29 3.12.1 Functions............................................................................................................. 3-29 3.12.2 Technical Specifications...................................................................................... 3-30 3.12.3 Indicators............................................................................................................. 3-30 3.12.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-31 3.13 SMUI .............................................................................................................................. 3-32 3.13.1 Functions............................................................................................................. 3-32 3.13.2 Technical Specifications...................................................................................... 3-32 3.13.3 Indicators............................................................................................................. 3-33 3.13.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-34 3.14 MRCA ............................................................................................................................ 3-34 3.14.1 Functions............................................................................................................. 3-34 3.14.2 Technical Specifications...................................................................................... 3-34 3.14.3 Indicators............................................................................................................. 3-35 3.14.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-36 3.15 MRIA .............................................................................................................................. 3-36 3.15.1 Functions............................................................................................................. 3-36 3.15.2 Technical Specifications...................................................................................... 3-36 3.15.3 Indicators............................................................................................................. 3-37 3.15.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-37 3.16 MSGI.............................................................................................................................. 3-37 3.16.1 Functions............................................................................................................. 3-37 3.16.2 Technical Specifications...................................................................................... 3-38 3.16.3 Indicators............................................................................................................. 3-39 3.16.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-40 3.17 UPWR ............................................................................................................................ 3-40 3.17.1 Functions............................................................................................................. 3-40 3.17.2 Technical Specifications...................................................................................... 3-40 3.17.3 Indicators............................................................................................................. 3-41 3.17.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-42 Chapter 4 Cables ........................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable.................................................................. 4-1 4.1.1 Input Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for Cabinet ........................... 4-1 4.1.2 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cables for Service Frame ....................... 4-3 4.1.3 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for KVMS Switcher........................ 4-3 4.1.4 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for LAN Switch .............................. 4-4 4.1.5 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for HP Server ................................ 4-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary iv
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Table of Contents
4.1.6 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for IBM Server............................... 4-5 4.1.7 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for Hard Disk Array ....................... 4-6 4.1.8 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for MRS......................................... 4-7 4.1.9 Other Protection Grounding Cables ........................................................................ 4-7 4.2 Internal Signal Cable ......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.2.1 Straight Through Cable ........................................................................................... 4-8 4.2.2 Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers (HP Server) ........................................ 4-10 4.2.3 Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers (IBM Server)....................................... 4-11 4.2.4 Data Cable Between iGWB Server and Hard Disk Array ..................................... 4-12 4.2.5 Server/Switcher Cable .......................................................................................... 4-12 4.2.6 Serial Port Cable for Monitoring Power Distribution Frame .................................. 4-13 4.2.7 Internal Clock Cable.............................................................................................. 4-14 4.3 External Signal Cable ...................................................................................................... 4-15 4.3.1 Trunk Cable between SoftX3000 and Digital Distribution Frame ......................... 4-15 4.3.2 Clock Signal Cable between SoftX3000 and BITS Device ................................... 4-20 4.3.3 External Network Cables of SoftX3000................................................................. 4-20 Appendix A Appendix ...................................................................................................................A-1 Index ................................................................................................................................................ i-1
Huawei Technologies Proprietary v
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components 1.1 Introduction to the Chapter This chapter first introduces the appearance, features, and components of SoftX3000 cabinet. Then, the chapter details the following components of the cabinet: z
Back istration module (BAM)
z
iGateway Bill (iGWB, when using IBM server)
z
Hard disk array
z
Cabling trough and cabling rack
z
Workstation
z
LAN Switches
z
Keyboard, Video, Mouse & Switcher (KVMS)
z
Air deflector
z
Power distribution frame (PDF)
For the media resource server (MRS) MRS6000-C used in SoftX30000, refer to U-SYS MRS6000-C Manual for details.
1.2 Appearance and Features of Cabinet 1.2.1 Cabinet Appearance Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of an N68-22 cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-1
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Figure 1-1 Appearance of N68-22 cabinet
1.2.2 Cabinet Architecture Figure 1-2 shows the architecture of N68-22 cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-2
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components (1)
(2) (6)
(4)
(5)
(3)
(7)
(1) Rack (4) Door lintel (7) N800
(2) Left side (5) Front door
(3) Left side (6) Rear door
Figure 1-2 Cabinet architecture The front door and rear door of the N68-22 cabinet each consists of two flip-open door s. The flip-open design saves installation space and facilitates operation on the cabinet. The side s are installed in hang-in mode. The mount angles on the side s are used to fasten internal cabinet components. There are grounding bars on the side posts at the back of the cabinet, which is used for grounding internal components and interconnecting grounding cables between cabinets. The wire-bushings on the side posts, the cable strips and cabling rack on the back of the cabinet are used for the layout and bundling of internal cables of the cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-3
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
The N68-22 cabinet can be installed on cement floor or ESD-preventive floor. When installing the N68-22 cabinet on the ESD-preventive floor, you have to use N800 series s.
1.2.3 N800 and Accessories I. Introduction to If N68-22 cabinets are installed in the equipment room with ESD-preventive floor, N800 series s are used. s, made of welded steel plates, are used to block the cabinets up, thus facilitating floor paving and cabling. Before the whole set of equipment is grounded, insulation plates must be installed under the s, and insulating coverings must be added to the expansion bolts to satisfy the insulation requirements. N800 series s have four kinds of components, of which three kinds are height adjustable and one kind is with fixed height. Figure 1-3 shows the outer appearance of an N800 . Table 1-1 shows the height adjustment range of each kind of component. (6)
(1)
(6)
(2) (7)
(4) (8)
(5)
(3)
(1) Upper (2) Height mark of ESD-preventive floor (3) Lower beam of (4) Standby installation hole (5) Installation hole (6) Connection hole for slide rail (7) Height-locking bolt (middle) (8) Height-locking bolt (side)
Figure 1-3 Appearance of N800
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-4
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Table 1-1 Height range of N800 components Component
Applicable ESD-preventive floor height (mm)
I
210 – 255
II
256 – 345
III
346 – 525
IV
Customized for the floor height (minimum height: 100 mm)
Note: The height of floor refers to the distance between the upper surface of ESD-preventive floor and the cement floor.
The height of N800 series I, II and III components can be adjusted within their adjustable ranges, which is realized by means of the relative move between upper beam and lower beam. N800 IV component is the of fixed height, which is applicable to ultra-high and ultra-low floors. The lowest applicable floor height of this component is 100 mm.
II. Introduction to floor holder-slide rail assemblies Floor holder-slide rail assemblies include three parts: z
Floor holder
z
Holder fixing component
z
Slide rail.
Floor holders are used to the floor around a cabinet, and can be divided into front and back floor holders, and side floor holders. Holder fixing components are installed under slide rails, and they are used to connect slide rails and front and back floor holders. Slide rails are used to connect the cabinet and s, and to move the equipment and adjust the equipment positions. They can two s and a cabinet together to keep the cabinet in a horizontal line and the connection stable. Due to their elasticity, the slide rails can absorb the vibrations. Figure 1-4 shows the appearance of a slide rail.
(2)
(1)
(1) Connection hole for
(2) Connection hole for cabinet
Figure 1-4 Appearance and dimensions of slide rail
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-5
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
III. Amount of s, Floor Holders, and Slide Rails To connect cabinets, 2N mode is used to determine the number of s to be used. That is, each N68-22 cabinet uses two s and N cabinets in a row need 2N s. Each cabinet has one set of floor holder-slide rail assemblies, and the sets are delivered together with the s. Each set of floor holder-slide rail assemblies include two slide rails, two side holders, one front floor holder and one back floor holder. Each cabinet needs two holder fixing components, one front floor holder, and one back floor holder, and each cabinet row needs two side floor holders, even if there is only one cabinet in a row.
1.2.4 Technical Specifications of N68-22 Cabinet Table 1-2 shows the technical specifications of the N68-22 cabinet. Table 1-2 Technical specifications of the N68-22 cabinet Item
Specifications
Design
It conforms to International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 297. The modular design facilitates expansion and maintenance.
Dimensio ns
2200 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth)
Capacity
Height of available space of a cabinet: 46 U (1 U = 44.45 mm). One cabinet can accommodate a maximum of four standard 19-inch frames.
Weight
130 kg as an empty cabinet, or 400 kg with full configuration
Cabling mode
There are cable-through holes both at the top and at the bottom of the cabinet, ing upward cabling and downward cabling.
Heat dissipatio n
The front and back doors and the bottom plate have minute air vents and are configured with air filters inside. The cabinet adopts front-in, back-out and bottom-to-top ventilation mode so that it has excellent heat dissipation and dust-proof functions. Fully considering EMC in cabinet design; all interfaces enjoy electromagnetic shielding.
Protection
The front and back doors and the bottom plate have minute air vents and are configured with air filters inside. There are anti-rodent bags at the cable-through holes to prevent dust and animals from entering the cabinet.
Material
N68-22 cabinet is assembled with electrolytic zinc-coated cold-rolled steel sheet and screws, featuring light weight, simple structure and high versatility. The fire-proof materials conform to the Underwriter Laboratory (UL) standards.
Color
The cabinet surface is Huawei purple-gray and NC silver-gray, and the rack is Huawei purple-gray.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-6
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.3 Classification of Cabinets 1.3.1 Overview of Cabinet Classification SoftX3000 cabinets fall into the following types according to cabinet components and actual configurations: z
Integrated configuration cabinet
z
Service processing cabinet
z
MRS cabinet
The MRS cabinet is required when you configure a separate MRS in SoftX3000.
1.3.2 Integrated Configuration Cabinet I. Overview of Integrated Configuration Cabinet The integrated configuration cabinet is mandatory. It includes iGWB, BAM, hard disk array, LAN Switch, KVMS, and service frames. There are three types of services frames: basic frame, expansion frame, and media resource frame. The integrated configuration cabinet provides the following features: z
Providing complete service processing ability.
z
Providing IP, clock, and TDM external interfaces
z
Managing communication between the host and the BAM.
z
Storing bills.
z
Providing MRS feature when configuring a media resource frame.
The configuration of integrated configuration cabinet in different countries and regions are different.
II. Integrated Configuration Cabinet in China When SoftX3000 is used in China, the BAM and the iGWB use HP servers. The BAM is not configured with hard disk array, and the iGWB is configured with built-in hard disk array. Figure 1-5 shows the configuration of an integrated configuration cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-7
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Power distribution frame (2U)
Expansion frame/Media resource frame/MRS6100 (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Basic frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler (1U) KVMS(1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) Blank filler (3U) BAM(2U) Standby iGWB (2U) Active iGWB (2U) LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U) Figure 1-5 Full configuration of integrated configuration cabinet (China)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-8
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
III. Integrated Configuration Cabinet in North America When SoftX3000 is used in North America, the BAM and the iGWB use IBM servers. The BAM is not configured with disk array, and the iGWB is configured with an external disk array. KVM and KVMS are two independent devices. Figure 1-6 shows the configuration of an integrated configuration cabinet. Power distribution frame (2U)
Expansion frame/Media resource frame/MRS6100 (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Basic frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U) KVM(1U) KVMS(1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) Hard disk array (3U) BAM(2U) Standby iGWB (2U) Active iGWB (2U) LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-6 Full configuration of integrated configuration cabinet (North America)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-9
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
IV. Integrated Configuration Cabinet in Other Countries and Regions When SoftX3000 is used in other countries and regions, the BAM and the iGWB use IBM servers. The BAM is not configured with disk array, and the iGWB is configured with an external disk array. KVM and KVMS are combined into one device. Figure 1-7 shows the configuration of an integrated configuration cabinet. Power distribution frame (2U)
Expansion frame/Media resource frame/MRS6100 (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Basic frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler (1U) KVMS(1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) Hard disk array (3U) BAM(2U) Standby iGWB (2U) Active iGWB (2U) LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-7 Full configuration of integrated configuration cabinet (other countries and regions)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-10
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
V. Configuration Guidance In an integrated configuration cabinet, iGWB, hard disk array (necessary only when the iGWB uses the IBM server), BAM, LAN Switch 0, LAN Switch 1, KVMS (or KVM, KVM switcher), air deflector, basic frame, and power distribution frame must be configured. Other components are optional.The LAN Switch 2 and LAN Switch 3 are optional components, and provide IP interfaces for SoftX3000 in coordination with the IFMI in the basic frame. If you choose a separate MRS, you must configure an expansion frame at the near top of the integrated configuration cabinet. Otherwise, configure a media resource frame or MRS6100 there.
VI. Configuration Notes If neither an expansion frame nor a media resource frame is configured at the near top of the integrated configuration cabinet, cover it with a standard blank filler . The media resource frame accommodates MRCA and MRIA only.
1.3.3 Service Processing Cabinet I. Overview of Service Processing Cabinet Except for host-BAM communication and bill storage features, the service processing cabinet provides the same features as the integrated configuration cabinet. The system capacity determines the number of service processing cabinets (four at maximum). Figure 1-8 shows the frame position details. All frames are configured in a bottom-to-top sequence.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-11
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Service processing cabinet 1
Service processing cabinet 2
Service processing cabinet 3
Service processing cabinet 4
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Media resource frame/ expansion frame (9U)
Media resource frame/ expansion frame (9U)
Media resource frame/ expansion frame (9U)
Media resource frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Basic frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-8 Full configuration of service processing cabinet
Note: When there are more than 100,000 equivalent subscribers, it is recommended to use a separate MRS. In this case, configure three service processing cabinets, and replace the media resource frames with expansion frames.
II. Configuration Guidance When there is no separate MRS configured in the SoftX3000, you need to configure a media resource frame in a service processing cabinet (with MRCAs and MRIAs). When a separate MRS is configured in the SoftX3000, there is no need to configure a media resource frame in a service processing cabinet. Three service processing cabinets meet the demand for full configuration. When there is more than one service processing cabinet, you have to configure a basic frame 1 on the top of the second service processing cabinet.
III. Configuration Notes All vacant frame positions must be covered with blank filler s.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-12
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.3.4 MRS Cabinet I. Overview of MRS Cabinet The MRS cabinet is required when there are more than 100,000 equivalent subscribers. It is used to provide MRS feature instead of media resource frames.
II. MRS Cabinet Adopting MRS600-C When MRS6000-C is used as MRS, an MRS cabinet is configured with a PDF and an MRS6000-C frame, both of which are in fixed positions in the cabinet. All the other empty positions in the cabinet are covered with blank filler s. Figure 1-9 shows the configuration of the MRS cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-13
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Power distribution frame (2U) Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (2U)
MRS6000-C (13U)
Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-9 Configuration of MRS cabinet adopting MRS6000-C
III. MRS Cabinet Adopting MRS6100 When MRS6100 is used as MRS, an MRS cabinet is configured with a PDF and an MRS6100 frame, both of which are in fixed positions in the cabinet. All the other empty
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-14
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
positions in the cabinet are covered with blank filler s. Figure 1-9 shows the configuration of the MRS cabinet. Power distribution frame (2U)
MRS6100 (9U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (2U) KVM (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-10 Configuration of MRS cabinet adopting MRS6100
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-15
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.3.5 Cabinet of SoftX3000 and SG7000 The configuration of cabinet of SoftX3000 and SG7000 in different countries and regions are different.
I. In China When the cabinet of SoftX3000 and SG7000 is used in China, the BAM and the iGWB both use HP server. The BAM uses hard disk array, and the iGWB uses built-in hard disk array. Figure 1-11 shows the configuration of the cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-16
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Power distribution frame (2U)
SoftX3000 basic frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
SG7000 frame (14U)
KVMS (1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) Blank filler (3U) SoftX3000 BAM (2U) Standby iGWB(2U) Active iGWB(2U) LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) SG7000 BAM (2U)
Figure 1-11 Configuration of cabinet of SoftX3000 and SG7000 (in China)
II. Outside China When the cabinet is used in other countries and regions, the BAM and the iGWB use IBM servers. BAM is not configured with disk array, and iGWB is configured with an external disk array. Figure 1-12 shows the configuration of the cabinet
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-17
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Power distribution frame (2U)
SoftX3000 basic frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
SG7000 frame (14U)
KVMS (1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) Hard disk array (3U) SoftX3000 BAM (2U) Standby iGWB(2U) Active iGWB(2U) LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) SG7000 BAM (2U) Figure 1-12 Configuration of cabinet of SoftX3000 and SG7000 (outside China)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-18
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.3.6 Cabinet of VIG8920—SoftX3000 and UMG8900 The configuration of VIG8920 cabinet in different countries and regions are different.
I. In China When the VIG8920 cabinet is used in China, the BAM and the iGWB both use HP server. The BAM uses hard disk array, and the iGWB uses built-in hard disk array. Figure 1-13 shows the configuration of the cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-19
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Power distribution frame (2U)
SoftX3000 basic frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
UMG8900 frame (12U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler (1U) KVMS(1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) Blank filler (3U) BAM (2U) Standby iGWB (2U) Active iGWB(2U)
Figure 1-13 Configuration of VIG8920 cabinet (in China)
II. Outside China When the VIG8920 cabinet is used in other countries and regions, the BAM and the iGWB use IBM servers. BAM is not configured with disk array, and iGWB is configured with an external disk array. Figure 1-14 shows the configuration of the cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-20
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Power distribution frame (2U)
SoftX3000 basic frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
UMG8900 frame (12U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler (1U) KVMS(1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) Hard disk array (3U) BAM (2U) Standby iGWB (2U) Active iGWB(2U) Figure 1-14 Configuration of VIG8920 cabinet (outside China)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-21
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.4 Typical Configurations of Cabinet 1.4.1 Overview of Cabinet Typical Configurations There are two cabinet typical configurations: z
Embedded MRS
z
Independent MRS
1.4.2 Embedded-MRS Mode This mode is used when there are less than 100,000 equivalent subscribers. In this mode, the media resource frame is configured in the integrated configuration cabinet, as shown in Figure 1-15.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-22
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Integrated configuration cabinet Power distribution frame (2U)
Service processing cabinet Power distribution frame (2U) Blank filler (3U)
Media resource frame (01) (9U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U) Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler (3U)
Basic frame (00) (9U)
Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (3U) Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler (1U)
Blank filler (3U)
KVMS (1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U) Cabling trough (1U)
Blank filler (3U)
Hard disk array (3U)
Blank filler (3U)
BAM (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Standby iGWB (2U) Active iGWB (2U)
Expansion frame (02) (9U)
LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-15 Cabinet configuration of embedded-MRS mode
1.4.3 Separate-MRS Mode I. Overview of Separate-MRS Mode This mode uses a separate MRS. It is used when there are more than 100,000 equivalent subscribers. The MRS cabinet and integrated configuration cabinet are mandatory. Configure the service processing cabinet according to system capacity. At maximum, four can be configured.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-23
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
II. Using MRS6000-C When using MRS6000-C, the MRS cabinet must be configured. Figure 1-16 shows the full configuration of separate-MRS mode using MRS6000-C. MRS cabinet
Integrated configuration cabinet
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Service processing cabinet 1
Service processing cabinet 2
Service processing cabinet 3
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U)
Media resource frame (9U)
Blank filler (3U) Air deflector (2U) Blank filler (2U)
Basic frame (9U)
MRS6000-C frame (13U)
Air deflector (2U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler 1U) KVMS (1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Cabling trough (1U) Blank filler (2U)
Hard disk array (3U) BAM (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Standby iGWB (2U) Blank filler (3U) Active iGWB (2U) Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (2U)
LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-16 Cabinet configuration of embedded-MRS mode (Using MRS6000-C)
III. Using MRS6100 When using MRS6100, if it is configured in the MRS cabinet, the configuration is as shown in Figure 1-17.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-24
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
MRS cabinet
Integrated configuration cabinet
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
MRS6100 frame (9U)
Media resource frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Service processing cabinet 1
Service processing cabinet 2
Service processing cabinet 3
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (3U)
Basic frame (9U)
Blank filler (3U) Air deflector (2U) KVM (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (3U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler 1U) KVMS (1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Cabling trough (1U) Hard disk array (3U) BAM (2U) Standby iGWB (2U)
Blank filler (3U) Active iGWB (2U) Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (2U)
LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-17 Using MRS6100 in MRS cabinet If the MRS6100 is configured in the integrated configuration cabinet, the configuration is as shown in Figure 1-18.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-25
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Integrated configuration cabinet Power distribution frame (2U)
MRS6100 frame (9U)
Service processing cabinet 1
Service processing cabinet 2
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler 1U) KVMS (1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U)
Service processing cabinet 3
Service processing cabinet 4
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Basic frame (9U)
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Cabling trough (1U) Hard disk array (3U) BAM (2U) Standby iGWB (2U) Active iGWB (2U) LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-18 Using MRS6100 in integrated configuration cabinet
1.5 Power Distribution Frame 1.5.1 Functions of Power Distribution Frame The power distribution frame (PDF) is installed at the top of an N68-22 cabinet. Two channels of -48 V power supply are diverted into a PDF where lightning protection and overcurrent protection operations are performed and finally six groups of -48 V power supplies are distributed to the functional frames in the cabinet. In addition, the PDF keeps monitoring the voltage of lead-in power and the state of distributed power. When detecting a fault, it generates an audio-visual alarm. The PDF consists of three parts: z
Monitoring unit
z
Lightning protection unit
z
Power output unit
Figure 1-19 shows the details.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-26
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
-48V1 BGND -48V2 BGND
Lightningprotection unit
PGND
Detecting lightningrelated faults
-48V2
Power output unit -48v1
SW4 SW5 SW6
SW1 SW2 SW3 BGND J7
Monitor unit
BGND
-48v2
External sensor
-48V1
J8
Air breaker
J1 Air J2 breaker J3 fault J4 detection J5 J6
I
II
III
MUTE ALM RS485 RUN port indicator indicator switch
IV
V
VI
Power output
Figure 1-19 Architecture of PDF The monitor unit contains two boards—power distribution monitor & control board (WDMB) and signals transfer board (WSTB) . The monitor unit detects and reports through RS485 serial port the status of two –48 VDC inputs, temperature, humidity, air-breaker, and lightning-protection unit. The lightning-protection unit contains two boards—overvoltage protection board (WOPB) and overvoltage protection transfer board (WOTB). It suppresses the overvoltage and overcurrent surges on the DC power input interfaces, and ensures the integrity of the SoftX3000 power system. The power output unit contains six –48V air breakers.
1.5.2 Appearance of Power Distribution Frame Figure 1-20 shows the appearance of the PDF.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-27
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
(1) WSTB (2) 16-pin terminal block (3) 6-pin terminal block (4) Bundling bulge (5) WOPB (6) Plastic (7) Air breaker (8) PDF body (9) Cable-through holes for air-breaker monitoring cables
Figure 1-20 Appearance of the PDF The PDF complies with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 297 standard. The dimensions of PDF are 88.9 mm (2 U, height) x 482.6 mm (19 inch, width) x 476.2 mm (depth).
1.5.3 Front View of Power Distribution Frame Figure 1-21 shows the front view of the PDF.
(1) Running indicator (2) Alarm indicator (4)~(6) -48V1 outlet control switches (7)~(9) -48V2 outlet control switches (10) Front of lightning protection unit
Figure 1-21 Front view of the PDF
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-28
(3) Sound/mute switch
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
There are two indicators on the front of the PDF. Table 1-3 shows the meanings of the indicators. Table 1-3 Meanings of the indicators on the front of the PDF Indicat or
Full name
Color
State Blinking frequency 0.5 Hz
Running indicator
RUN
Green
Alarm indicator
ALM
Red
Meaning of state
is
There are power inputs, and the PDF is working well.
Blinking frequency is 4 Hz
The board is not running. The communication with SMUI is interrupted.
Off
There is no power input, or the PDF fails.
On or blinking fast
Alarming, indicating faults in the PDF.
Off
There is no fault.
The sound/mute switch on the front is used to select whether or not to produce alarm sound pertaining to the power distribution frame. If the switch is ON, alarm sound will be produced whenever a fault is encountered in the power distribution frame. If the switch is OFF, alarm sound will be muted when a fault is encountered in the PDF. Table 1-4 shows the relationship between the six power control switches and the internal components of the cabinets. Table 1-4 Relationship between the components and the control switch Cabinet type
Integrated cabinet
configuration
Component
Control switch
Active iGWB
SW2, SW4
Standby iGWB
SW1, SW3
BAM
SW3, SW4
Hard disk array (Only when using IBM server)
SW1, SW6
LAN Switch 0
SW3
LAN Switch 1
SW2
KVMS
SW4
Basic frame 0
SW4, SW5
Expansion frame 1
SW5, SW6
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-29
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Cabinet type
Service processing cabinet
MRS cabinet
Component
Control switch
Expansion frame 2
SW5, SW6
Expansion frame 3
SW3, SW4
Expansion frame 4
SW2, SW3
Expansion frame 5
SW1, SW2
MRS frame
SW1, SW2
1.5.4 Rear View of Power Distribution Frame There are input and output terminal blocks and monitor ports on the rear of the PDF, as shown in Figure 1-22.
(1) Power input terminal block (3) External ports from WDMC
(2) Power output terminal block
Figure 1-22 Back view of the PDF The PDF receives two –48 V power inputs and provides six independent –48 V power outputs. The connection positions of –48V power cables and BGND are marked on the power input and output terminal busbar. The PDF provides the following external interfaces: z
One RS485 serial port
z
Five detection interfaces of external Boolean value
z
One cascade inlet and one cascade outlet for cabinet indicator alarm
z
One cabinet indicator interface
z
One alarm row indicator interface
z
One alarm column indicator interface
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-30
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Monitor cable of the PDF is connected to the RS485 serial port marked with COM1 and COM2. The PDF receives two –48 V power inputs and provides six independent –48 V power outputs. The connection positions of –48V power cables and BGND are marked on the power input and output terminal busbar. The PDF provides two RS485 serial ports, five external Boolean-value detection interfaces, one cabinet concatenation input interface, one cabinet concatenation output interface, one alarm column LED, and one alarm row LED. The monitor cables of the PDF connect with COM1 and COM2 RS485 serial ports. Table 1-5 shows the functions of the external interfaces on the PDF. Table 1-5 Functions of external interfaces on the WDMB of the PDF Name
Function
Remark
COM1
Active RS485 serial port
COM2
Standby RS485 serial port
Connecting the WSMU with the monitor cables of the PDF
COM4
Serial port
Not used
P2
Inverter alarm input interface
Not used
J113
Cabinet concatenation output interface
J114
Cabinet concatenation input interface
J112
Cabinet alarm row LED
J111
Cabinet alarm column LED
J106
Reserved interface
Boolean-value
detection
J105
Reserved interface
Boolean-value
detection
J104
Flood switch interface
1.5.5 Technical Specifications of Power Distribution Frame Table 1-6, Table 1-7, Table 1-8, and Table 1-9 shows the technical specifications of the PDF. Table 1-6 Input specifications of the PDF Item
Specifications
Rated voltage
input
Range of voltage
input
–48V –72V to –36V
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-31
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Item
Specifications
Input mode Maximum current
Two –48 V inputs or one –48 V input input
Two –48 V, 150 A inputs, working in hot backup mode.
Table 1-7 Output specifications of the PDF Item
Specifications
Rated output voltage
–48 V
Range of output voltage
–72 V to –36V
Output tributary
70 A: Six 70 A connection-controllable, short-circuit protected tributaries
Output features
70 A: 87.5 A at protection point, manual recovery
protection
Rated output power
Hot backup mode: 5500 W (–48 V)
Table 1-8 EMC specifications of the PDF Item Electromagnetic interference (EMI)
Sub-item
Specifications
Radiant disturbances
ed Class B test of CISPR22.
Conducted disturbances
ed Class B test of CISPR22.
Radiant susceptibility
10V/m, 80% AM (1 kHz) on shell
ESD
discharge: ±6 kV.Air discharge: ±8 kV
Instant pulse
Bestow a test signal of 5/50 ns, 5-kHz Rep. freq on the signal cables (0.5 kV) and power cables (1 kV). The cables are working normally.
Conducted susceptibility
Bestow a test signal of 0.15–80 MHz, 3 V, 80% AM (1 kHz) on the power cables and signal cables. The cables are working normally.
Surging current
Bestow a test signal of 1.2/50 µs, 2 kV for common mode and 1 kV for differential mode, on the power cables. The power cables are working normally
Electromagnetic susceptibility (EMS)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-32
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Table 1-9 Other specifications of the PDF Item
Sub-item
Specifications
Differential mode protection
Cast five times of 8/2-µs, 3-kA test current between the –48-V BGND and PGND in both directions. The residual voltage ≤200 V.
Common-mode protection
Cast five times of 8/2-µs, 5-kA test current between the –48-V BGND and PGND in both directions. The residual voltage ≤ 300 V.
Working temperature
–10°C – +50°C
Storage temperature
-40°C– +70°C
Relatively humidity
≤95%
DC lightning protection
Environment
Environment
ed IEC60950, EN60950, UL60950, and GB4943 certifications.
Safety
1.6 Air Deflector 1.6.1 Functions of Air Deflector As show in Figure 1-23, an air deflector is used to smooth and divert air to a different direction and separate heat dissipation channels of the frames, so that air can be taken in from the front and exhausted to the rear. Moreover, the pressure consumption of the air can be minimized through an air deflector.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-33
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Power distribution frame Service frame
Fan box Air deflector
Service frame Front of a cabinet
Rear of a cabinet Fan box Air deflector Service frame
Fan box
Figure 1-23 Heat dissipation channel inside a cabinet (side view)
1.6.2 Appearance of Air Deflector An air deflector is 2 U high and 373.3 mm deep. There are a number of ventilation holes on its plastic front , as shown in Figure 1-24.
Figure 1-24 Air deflector structure
1.7 KVMS 1.7.1 Functions of KVMS The KVMS is an integration of keyboard, video, mouse, and switcher installed in the SoftX3000 cabinet. It provides four groups of interfaces. Each group has one keyboard interface, one mouse interface, and one LCD interface. You can connect with the four groups of interfaces to monitor the BAM, active iGWB, and standby iGWB, using three separate computers. To switch between these three servers, use the OSD menu.
1.7.2 Appearance of KVMS Figure 1-25 shows the appearance of the KVMS.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-34
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Figure 1-25 Appearance of KVMS Figure 1-26 shows the appearance of the unfolded KVMS.
Figure 1-26 Appearance of the unfolded KVMS The KVMS provides four groups of interfaces from its rear . Each group has one keyboard interface, one mouse interface, and one LCD interface. It also provides a power input terminal and a protection grounding connection terminal.
Figure 1-27 Rear view of KVMS
1.7.3 Technical Specifications of KVMS Table 1-10 shows the technical specifications of the KVMS.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-35
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Table 1-10 Technical specifications of the KVMS Category
Item
Mechanical specificatio ns
Dimensions
445mm (width) x 42mm (height) x 423mm (depth)
Model and size of LCD
15.1” TFT LCD
Monitor interface
HD-DB-15 male
Keyboard and mouse interfaces
PS/2
Input
–48V, 2A
Output
–12V, 5A
Scan interval
3, 8, 15, and 30 seconds
Interface type Electrical performanc e
Performanc e specificatio ns
Environme nt requiremen ts
Length cable
of
Specifications
signal
30 m at maximum
Display resolution
1024 x 768, at 85 Hz of refresh rate
Keyboard repeat rate (typing speed)
10, 15, 20 or 30 characters per second
Working temperature
0ºC – 50ºC
Storage temperature
–20ºC – +60ºC
1.8 LAN Switch 1.8.1 Functions of LAN Switch In an integrated configuration cabinet, Huawei Quidway S3528G LAN Switch (hereinafter referred to as the S3528G) interconnects frames and servers, achieves dual
planes
for
inter-component
communication
channels,
and
provides
inter-component communication and active/standby configuration functions.
Note: For the details of S3528G service features, refer to Quidway S3500 Series Ethernet Switches Operation Manual.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-36
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.8.2 Front View of LAN Switch On
the
front
of
the
S3528G,
there
are
power
LED,
24
fixed
10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet interfaces and the Console interface. Figure 1-28 shows the details. (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(5)
(1) Power LED (4) Mode switching status LED (6) GBIC interface and LED
(7)
(6)
(2) GBIC interface status LED (3) Mode switch button (5) 10Base-T/100 Base-TX interface LED (7) Console
Figure 1-28 Front view of S3528G Table 1-11 lists the meaning of LEDs on the front of the S3528G. Table 1-11 Description of LEDs on the front of S3528G LED name
Identity
Power LED
Mode LED
switching
10Base-T/100Base-TX interface LED (when mode switching status LED is A/L) (default)
Meaning
On
Power on
Off
Power off
A/L
On
D/S
Off
Indicates the 100Mbit/s interface ACTIVE/LINK status
A/L
Off
D/S
On
PWR
status
Status
ACTIVE (Orange)
LINK (Green)
On
Sending and receiving data
Off
Not sending or receiving data
On
Connected
Off
Disconnected
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-37
Indicates the 100Mbit/s interface DUPLEX/SPEED status
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
LED name
Identity
10Base-T/100Base-TX interface LED (when mode switching status LED is D/S)
Status
DUPLEX (Orange)
SPEED (Green)
ACTIVE (Orange) GBIC interface status LED LINK (Green)
Meaning
On
Interface duplex
working
in
Off
Interface working in half duplex
On
Interface speed is 100 Mbit/s
Off
Interface speed is 10 Mbit/s
On
Sending and receiving data
Off
Not sending or receiving data
On
Connected
Off
Disconnected
1.8.3 Rear View of LAN Switch Figure 1-29 shows the rear view of the S3528G. There are two DC power sockets and a grounding post.
(1)
(2)
(1) DC power socket
(3)
(2) Backup DC power socket
(3) Grounding post
Figure 1-29 Rear view of S3528G
1.8.4 Technical Specifications of LAN Switch Table 1-12 shows the technical specifications of the S3528G. Table 1-12 Technical specifications of the S3528G Item
Specifications
Dimensions
436.2 mm (width) x 42 mm (height) x 240 mm (depth) (not including plastic decorative )
Weight
≤5kg
Backplane switching capacity
32 Gbit/s
Port switching capacity
12.8 Gbit/s
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-38
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Item
Specifications
Management port
One console port
Fixed port
24 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet electric interfaces (RJ-45 connector); four GBIC module interfaces
Optional module
None
Serviced performance
10/100BASE-TX
Port type
1000BASE-GBIC Rated voltage: –48V to –60V Maximum voltage: –36V to –72V
voltage inputted
ing redundancy power input Power consumption (full load)
40 W
Temperature
0 C to 45 C
Relatively humidity
10% to 90%
o
o
1.9 Cabling Trough 1.9.1 Functions of Cabling Trough The cabling trough and cabling rack are used for laying and bundling cables in SoftX3000 cabinets. The cabling trough is configured below the LAN Switch. The network cables leading out of the LAN Switch front are laid across the cabling trough to the back of the cabinet. There are three cabling racks—horizontal cabling rack (1 U), rear cabling rack (1 U), and side-hung fiber management tray (FMT).
1.9.2 Appearance and Architecture of Cabling Trough The cabling trough is 1 U in height. There are many U-shaped troughs for cable lead-ins. On the bottom plate, there are ventilation holds. Refer to Figure 1-30 for appearance and architecture.
(1) Mount angle
Figure 1-30 Appearance and architecture of cabling trough
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-39
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.10 IBM EXP400 Hard Disk Array 1.10.1 Overview of Hard Disk Array The IBM EXP4000 hard disk array is required in IBM X343 server used as the iGWB server. The hard disk array accomplishes the redundancy backup of the billing data.
1.10.2 Appearance of Hard Disk Array The IBM EXP400 hard disk array is in standard 19-inch architecture. It is installed in the cabinet through two independent rails—one in the left and the other in the right. The IBM EXP400 hard disk array is installed together with IBM X343 server in the cabinet. Figure 1-31 shows its architecture from the rear side angle of view.
(1) Blank tray (2) Bridge card (4) Enclosure Services Module (5) Power supply (7) Chassis assembly with midplane
(3) Front bezel assembly (6) Rails, left and right
Figure 1-31 Diagram of IBM EXP400 hard disk array The RAID adapter of each iGWB server connects with the interface of one channel of the IBM EXP400 hard disk array. One iGWB server controls the left seven hard disks through the left channel, while the other iGWB server controls the right seven hard disks through the right channel. The two channels do not interfere with each other.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-40
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.10.3 Front View of Hard Disk Array The hard disk array contains 14 hard disk drawers, and is divided into two separate channels linked by a bridge card. Each channel can hold seven hard disks at maximum. The hard disks are equipped in a pluggable, architecture. Refer to Figure 1-32 for details.
Figure 1-32 Front view of IBM EXP400 hard disk array On the bay of each hard disk, there are two LEDs which indicate the working status of the hard disk. There are three LEDs on the upper left part of the front of the hard disk array. Table 1-13 shows the meanings of the LEDs. Table 1-13 Meaning of LEDs on the front of the hard disk array LED name Power-on LED
Generalsystem- error LED
Box identity LED
Status LED
Color
Status On
There is power input. The power supply is normal in the hard disk array.
Off
There is no power input, or the power module is faulty.
On
Alarm state, meaning that the hard disk array is faulty.
Off
No fault.
On
The hard disk array is identified by the server.
Off
The hard disk array is not identified by the server.
On
Hard disk is faulty.
Flashing
The server is identifying or restarting the hard disk.
Off
The hard disk is working normally.
Green
Amber
Blue
Amber
Meaning
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-41
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
LED name Activity LED
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Color Green
Status Flashing
Meaning The hard disk is reading and writing data.
1.10.4 Rear View of Hard Disk Array The rear part of the hard disk array is also divided into two independent parts—a left part and a right part. Each part contains a power module and an enclosure services module (ESM). The two modules are pluggable. Each ESM provides a small computer systems interface (SCSI) to connect the server. Figure 1-33 shows the details.
Figure 1-33 Rear view of IBM EXP400 hard disk array Table 1-14 shows the meanings of LEDs on the rear of the hard disk array. Table 1-14 Meaning of LEDs on the rear of the hard disk array LAD name Termination-power LED
LVD/SE LED
Activity LED
Color
Status On
The power supply to the peer server is normal.
Off
The power supply to the peer server is faulty.
On
The external host bus is in low voltage differential (LVD) mode.
Off
The external host bus single-ended(SE) mode.
Flashin g
The hard disk is reading and writing data.
Green
Green
Green
Meaning
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-42
is
in
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
LAD name SCSI reset LED
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Color Green
Fault LED
Amber
AC power LED
Green
DC power LED
Green
Fault LED
Amber
Status
Meaning
On
The SCSI bus is resetting.
On
The ESM is faulty.
Off
The ESM is working normally.
On
The AC power supply is normal.
Off
The AC power supply is faulty.
On
The DC power supply is normal.
Off
The DC power supply is faulty.
On
A power supply failure or that a redundant power supply is not turned on.
Flashin g
The built-in fan fails.
Off
Power supply is normal.
1.10.5 Technical Specifications of Hard Disk Array Table 1-15 shows the technical specifications of the hard disk array. Table 1-15 Technical specifications of hard disk array Category Mechanical specifications
Electrical performance External interfaces
Environment requirements
Item
Specifications
Dimensions
447 mm (Width) x 128 mm (Height) x 540 mm (Depth)
Weight
37.3 kg in full configuration
Rated voltage
–48V
Rated current
5A
Range of input power
60W – 450W
Ultra320 SCSI
2
Working temperature
10ºC–40ºC
Temperature variation
No more than 10ºC per hour
Relatively humidity
20% – 80%, non-condensing
Humidity variation
No more than 10% per hour
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-43
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.11 BAM and iGWB Server (HP Server) 1.11.1 Functions of BAM and iGWB Server (HP Server) The BAM is the server of the operation and maintenance (OAM) system. It bridges the workstations and the SoftX3000. The BAM forwards the OAM commands from local and remote workstations to SoftX3000, and sends the response messages from SoftX3000 to the workstations. The BAM also stores and transfers the alarm and traffic measurement data. The iGWB server is an intermediate billing device between SoftX3000 and the billing center. It receives, pre-processes, and stores bills at a speed of 1700 CDRs per second. The iGWB server also provides billing interface. The iGWB server works in active/standby mode. The BAM and the iGWB server are configured in fixed positions in the integrated configuration cabinet. Both adopt HP ProLiant DL380 G3 server.
1.11.2 View of iGWB Server I. Front View of iGWB Server Figure 1-34 shows the front view of iGWB server.
(1) Hard disk drive bay (six in total)
(2) Floppy disk drive
(3) CD-ROM drive
Figure 1-34 Front view of iGWB/BAM server At the right side of the front of the server, there is a line of indicators. See Figure 1-35.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-44
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
(1) Internal status indicator (4) NIC2 connection indicator
(2) External status indicator (5) UID indicator
(3) NIC1 connection indicator (6) Power button/ indicator
Figure 1-35 Front view of iGWB/BAM server
II. Rear View of iGWB Server Figure 1-36 shows the rear view of iGWB server.
(1) Extended slot PCI-X 3 (for installing network adapter 1) (2) Extended slot PCI-X 2 (for installing network adapter 0) (3) Extended slot PCI-X 1 (4) Serial port (5) iLO interface (6) Mouse interface (7) Power socket (8) VHDCI SCSI interface (9) Monitor interface (10) USB interface (11) NIC connection interface (matching with network adapters 2 and 3) (12) Keyboard interface
Figure 1-36 Rear view of iGWB/BAM server Figure 1-37 shows the indicators on the back of iGWB/BAM server.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-45
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
(1) PCI slot 3 hot-swap fault indicator (3) PCI slot 2 hot-swap fault indicator (5) RJ-45 interface connection indicator (7) UID indicator/ button
(2) PCI slot 3 hot-swap power indicator (4) PCI slot 2 hot-swap power indicator (6) RJ-45 interface activation indicator (8) Power indicator
Figure 1-37 Rear view of iGWB/BAM server
1.11.3 Technical Specifications of BAM and iGWB Server The power consumption of HP ProLiant DL380 G3 server is 250 W. Table 1-16 shows its hardware configurations. Table 1-16 Hardware settings of HP server Configuration
Item
BAM
iGWB
U
Two Xeon DP 2.4GHz U or higher processors
Hard disk
Two 36-GB hard disks (10,000 RPM SCSI hard disks)
Memor y
4 × 256 MB
Networ k adapter RAID adapter
5 × 73GB
2 x 100/1000 Mbit/s integrated network adaptors 2 x 10/100 Mbit/s extended network adaptors Integrated Smart Array 5i Plus, single channel
Note: The hardware configuration of the BAM and iGWB server may be updated; so the preceding configuration is for reference only.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-46
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.12 BAM and iGWB Server (IBM Server) 1.12.1 Functions of BAM and iGWB Server The BAM is the server of the operation and maintenance (OAM) system. It bridges the workstations and the SoftX3000. The BAM forwards the OAM commands from local and remote workstations to SoftX3000, and sends the response messages from SoftX3000 to the workstations. The BAM also stores and transfers the alarm and traffic measurement data. The iGWB server is an intermediate billing device between SoftX3000 and the billing center. It receives, pre-processes, and stores bills at a speed of 1700 CDRs per second. The iGWB server also provides billing interface. The iGWB server works in active/standby mode. The BAM and the iGWB server are configured in fixed positions in the integrated configuration cabinet. Both adopt IBM X343 server.
1.12.2 Front View of BAM and iGWB Server Figure 1-38 shows the front view of the iGWB server with the bezel.
A Bezel B Peripheral bay D Power switch E Reset switch G Major alarm indicator H Minor alarm indicator J Network adapter status indicator L Power supply status indicator M Bezel removal N Hard drive tray thumbscrews
C NMI switch F Critical alarm indicator I Power alarm indicator K Hard disk status indicator
Figure 1-38 Front view of iGWB/BAM server with bezel Figure 1-39 shows the front view of the server with the bezel removed.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-47
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
A Floppy drive B CD-ROM drive C Front switches and indicators D Hard drive tray E Left SCSI drive bay F Hard drive tray ribbon cable connector G Hard drive tray power H Right SCSI drive bay connector
Figure 1-39 Front view of iGWB/BAM server with bezel removed
1.12.3 Rear View of BAM and iGWB Server Figure 1-40 shows the back view of the iGWB server.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-48
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
A Three half-length 64-bit, 66 MHz PCI add-in board slots (3.3 V riser board) B DB-15 male connector for front alarm relay s C Three full height, full length 64-bit, 33 MHz PCI add-in board slots (5 V riser board), upper one of which is used for RAID adapter (with SCSI interfaces and disk array cables), and the other two of which are used for network adapters 2 and 3 D Redundant, hot-plug power supplies E Four-terminal DC input power connector for DC input power supply cage F USB port 1 G Video connector H External wide SCSI Ultra160 68-pin connector I Dual NIC 10/100 E/N RJ45 connectors NIC 1 (lower) and NIC 2 (upper), of which the upper one is used for network adapter 1 and the lower one is used for network adapter 0. J The PS/2 port can accept both keyboard and mouse. Use the included “Y” splitter cable to connect a mouse and a keyboard to the PS/2 port at the same time. K Serial port (COM2), 8-pin RJ45 connector L USB port 0 M Two grounding plugs for attachment of grounding wire to chassis
Figure 1-40 Back view of iGWB/BAM server
1.12.4 Technical Specifications of BAM and iGWB Server The power consumption of IBM X343 server is 350 W. Table 1-17 shows its hardware configurations. Table 1-17 Hardware settings of IBM X343 server Item
Configuration BAM
iGWB
U
Two Intel Pentium III 1.26 GHz or higher processors
Hard disk
Two 36-GB hard disks (10,000 RPM SCSI hard disks)
Two 34-GB hard disks (10,000 RPM SCSI hard disks) Ten 73-GB hard disks (hard disk array)
Memory
Two 1-GB memory chips
Network adapter
Four 10/100-Mbit/s network adapters
RAID adapter
Single ServeRAID-4L adapter
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-49
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Note: The hardware configuration of the BAM server may be updated; so the preceding configuration is for reference only.
1.13 Workstation 1.13.1 Functions of Workstation There are three types of workstations used in SoftX3000: z
Emergency workstation
z
Maintenance terminal
z
Operation terminal
The workstation serves the following purposes: z
Data configuration
z
Data backup
z
Equipment status query
z
Equipment maintenance
The emergency workstation automatically backs up BAM data every four hours by default. When BAM is down, the emergency workstation will work as BAM with the backup data. When BAM recovers, the normal work mode is resumed. Therefore, the emergency workstation is the backup device for BAM.
1.13.2 Technical Specifications of Workstation The workstation is a desktop PC, and is not installed in the cabinet. Table 1-18 lists the hardware requirements of workstation. Table 1-18 Hardware requirements of workstation Component
Specifications
U
Pentium IV 1.7 GHz or higher
Memory
512 MB
Hard disk
40 GB
Floppy drive
1
CD-ROM
1
Integrated graphic card and sound card
Integrated in the motherboard
10/100 Mbit/s interface card
One (three for emergency workstation)
auto-sensing
network
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-50
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
In addition, the emergency workstation requires an MO drive.
Note: The hardware of the emergency workstation might be different from the manual.
1.14 Universal Alarm Box The universal alarm box, also known as GM12ALMZ alarm box, is designed with chassis architecture of advanced techniques and optimal layout. The design of the universal alarm box fully considers operability, maintainability, and security. Figure 1-41 shows the appearance of the universal alarm box.
Figure 1-41 Appearance of the universal alarm box For detailed installation procedure and cable connections, refer to Universal Alarm Box Manual delivered with the alarm box.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-51
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame 2.1 Introduction to the Chapter This chapter details the features, classification, and composition of the open standard telecom architecture (OSTA) frame used in SoftX3000 cabinets. The chapter also elaborates on the fan box, which is an internal component of the OSTA frame.
2.2 Overview of OSTA Frame The frame is an independent working unit, which is composed of boards plugged in the same backplane. SoftX3000 adopts the OSTA hardware platform. The OSTA platform has four types of backplane buses: z
Shared resource bus
z
Ethernet bus
z
H.110 bus
z
Serial bus
The OSTA frame features high adaptability and reliability. This is applicable to the exchange and transfer of length-variable data packets of the softswitch.
2.3 Features of OSTA Frame The OSTA platform is structured in a standard frame which is 19 inches wide and 9U high. Each OSTA frame is equipped with a pluggable fan box at its lower part, as shown in Figure 2-1
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-1
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
(1) Fan box
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
(2) Front view of OSTA frame
(3) Rear view of OSTA frame
Figure 2-1 Appearance of OSTA frame Service frame has the following features. z
A frame is 19 inches wide and 9U high, conforming to IEC297.
z
A fan box is installed at the bottom of each service frame.
z
A frame accommodates both front boards and back boards
z
All the front boards and back boards are plugged in the backplane.
z
All cables are led out from the back of the frame.
z
Each frame has 21 slots.
z
A frame has temperature detection and fan speed adjustment functions.
2.4 Board Allocation of OSTA Frame All OSTA frames share the same hardware architecture. Each frame is designed with 21 standard slots. The following boards are always configured in fixed positions: z
System Management Units (SMUIs)
z
System Interface Units (SIUIs)
z
Hot-Swap and Control Units (HSCIs)
z
Alarm Units (ALMIs)
z
Universal Power Modules (UPWRs) (occupying the width of 2 standard board slots)
These boards occupy 9 slots in total. The remaining 12 slots are used for service boards (front boards) and interface boards (back boards). Figure 2-2 shows the board allocation specifics.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-2
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame (2)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(4)
(5)
(6) (7)
(1) Power boards (4) Back boards (7) Service boards
(8)
(2) Interface boards (5) Backplanes (8) System management boards
(7)
(9)
(1)
(3) Ethernet communication boards (6) Front boards (9) Alarm board
Figure 2-2 Board allocation in an OSTA frame The board design in the OSTA frame separates the functions of front boards and back boards. It simplifies the design of boards and unifies the functions to be provided by each board, reducing hardware complexity, improving system reliability, frame adaptability, and configuration flexibility.
2.5 Fan Box 2.5.1 Overview of Fan Box A fan box is installed at the bottom of each service frame. It is designed for heat dissipation. The fan box is made of plastic parts. Each fan box accommodates six fans. The diameter of each fan is 119 mm, and the thickness is 32 mm.
2.5.2 Functions of Fan Box A speed adjustment technique is used in the fans. On the premise of normal heat dissipation and reliable running, the rotation speed of the fans can be controlled. The fans are hot-swappable. The running state of the fans can be known by observing the indicators. The fan box can be maintained through a remote network management terminal.
2.5.3 Front View of Fan Box The front view of a fan box is shown in Figure 2-3. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-3
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
(1) Captive screw
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
(2) Fan state indicator
Figure 2-3 Front view of a fan box If the state indicator turns green and blinks at a frequency of 1 Hz, it means that all the fans work well. Otherwise, the fans might work abnormally, the communication monitor board might be faulty, or the power supply for the fan box might fail.
2.5.4 Technical Specifications of Fan Box Input voltage: –58 V – 40 V Maximum power consumption of a fan box: 105 W Communication rate through RS485: 9.6 kbit/s
2.6 Classification of Frames 2.6.1 Overview of Frame Classification The DIP switch on the SIUI determines the frame number. The SMUI reads the DIP switch on the SIUI and retrieves frame number. For the relationship between the DIP-switch settings of the SIUI and the frame number, refer to chapter 3 “Boards” for details. Depending on different board types configured, SoftX3000 frames fall into four types: z
Basic frame 0
z
Basic frame 1
z
Expansion frame
z
Media resource frame.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-4
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
2.6.2 Basic Frame 0 I. Functions of Basic Frame 0 Basic frame 0 must be configured in the integrated configuration cabinet. The basic frame 0 provides a number of external interfaces such as clock, E1, and IP. A basic frame 0 can provide all service processing capabilities. In the basic frame 0, CKIIs, IFMIs/BFIIs and CDBIs can be configured.
II. Board Allocation of Basic Frame 0 Figure 2-4 shows the configuration of front boards and back boards in basic frame 0.
Back Board
B F I I
B F I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
S I U I
H S C I
S I U I
H S C I
Slot No
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
I F M I
F C C U / F C S U
F C C U / F C S U
F C C U / F C S U
F C C U / F C S U
Front Board
I F M I
S M U I
S M U I
C K I I
10
C D B I
C K I I
U P W R
11
12
13
14
15
16
C D B I
B S G I / M S G I
B S G I / M S G I
B S G I / M S G I
B S G I / M S G I
A L U I
17
U P W R
18
19
U P W R
20
U P W R
Figure 2-4 Board allocation in basic frame 0
III. Board Configuration Guide of Basic Frame 0 The SMUIs, SIUIs, HSCIs, ALUI, and UPWRs must be configured in fixed positions in basic frame 0. Table 2-1 shows the details. Table 2-1 Board positions in basic frame 0 Board name
Slot number
Front or Back
SMUI
6 and 8
Front
HSCI
7 and 9
Back
ALUI
16
Front
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-5
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
Board name
Slot number
UPWR
CKII
Front or Back
17+18
Front and Back
19+20
Front and Back
12+13
Back
14+15
Back
The IFMIs and BFIIs in the left half frame and CDBIs in the right half frame must be configured. Their configuration slots are fixed. When the networking is to provide narrowband signaling interfaces, the following board should be configured: z
Fixed calling control unit and signaling process units (FCSUs)
z
E1_pool interface units (EPIIs)
z
CKIIs
z
Broadband signaling gateway boards (BSGIs)
z
Multimedia signaling gateway units (MSGIs)
When the networking is not to provide narrowband signaling interfaces, the following boards are required: z
Fixed calling control units (FCCUs)
z
BSGIs
z
MSGIs
An FCSU and an EPII must be configured in pairs and inserted in the same slots at the front and back. The back slots 12 – 16 are always reserved for the CKIIs. The FCCU/FCSU/BSGI/MSGI compatible slots are front slots 2 – 5 and 12 – 15. It is recommended to configure FCCUs/FCSUs from left to right and BSGIs/MSGIs from right to left. For empty slots without boards configured, it is required to cover them with blank filler s.
2.6.3 Basic Frame 1 I. Functions of Basic Frame 1 When the number of equivalent subscribers is greater than 500,000, basic frame 1 must be configured. A basic frame 1 provides IP and Ethernet interfaces externally, and can provide all service processing capabilities. For every increase of 500,000 equivalent subscribers, add a pair of IFMIs in basic frame 1 to provide external IP and Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-6
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
Ethernet interfaces. When the number of equivalent subscribers is greater than 1,000,000, add a pair of CDBIs in the basic frame 1.
Note: Because a maximum of 4 pairs of IFMIs and 2 pairs of CDBIs are configured in
z
SoftX3000, at most one basic frame 0 and one basic 1 are required for the whole system. In the basic frame 1, CKIIs cannot be configured but IP Forward Modules
z
(IFMIs)/Back insert FE Interface Units (BFIIs) and Central Database Boards (CDBIs) can be configured. The IFMIs/BFIIs provide IP interfaces. In the basic frame 0, CKIIs, IFMIs/BFIIs and CDBIs can be configured.
II. Board Allocation of Basic Frame 1 Figure 2-5 shows the configuration of front boards and back boards in basic frame 1.
Back Board
B F I I
B F I I
B F I I / E P I I
Slot No
0
1
2
3
4
5
I F M I / F C C U / F C S U
I F M I / F C C U / F C S U
I F M I / F C C U / F C S U
I F M I / F C C U / F C S U
Front Board
I F M I
I F M I
B F I I / E P I I
B F I I / E P I I
B F I I / E P I I
S I U I
H S C I
S I U I
H S C I
6
7
8
9
S M U I
S M U I
U P W R
10
C D B I
11
12
13
14
15
16
C D B I
B S G I / M S G I
B S G I / M S G I
B S G I / M S G I
B S G I / M S G I
A L U I
17
U P W R
18
U P W R
19
20
U P W R
Figure 2-5 Board allocation in basic frame 1
III. Board Configuration Guide of Basic Frame 1 When there are more than two IFMIs or two CDBIs, basic frame 1 must be configured.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-7
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
SMUIs, SIUIs, HSCIs, ALUI, and UPWRs must be configured. SMUIs are configured invariably in the front slots 6 and 8, HSCIs configured in the back slots 7 and 9, ALUI in the front slot 16, and UPWRs in both front and back slots (17, 18) and (19, 20). In the slots 2– 5, IFMIs are preferred; in the slots 12 – 15, CDBIs are preferred. If empty front slots are still left after IFMIs and CDBIs have been inserted, the left slots are available for FCSUs, FCCUs, BSGIs, MSGIs and EPIIs. It is recommended to configure FCCUs/FCSUs from left to right and configure BSGIs/MSGIs from right to left. An FCSU and an EPII must be configured in pairs and inserted in the same slots at the front and back. For empty slots without boards configured, it is required to cover them with blank filler s.
2.6.4 Expansion Frame I. Functions of Expansion Frame The expansion frame is optional, and can be configured as service processing frames depending on the subscriber capacity. Expansion frames cannot exist by itself; they must cooperate with the basic frame 0 to provide service processing functions.
II. Board Allocation of Expansion Frame Figure 2-6 shows the configuration of front boards and back boards in the expansion frame.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-8
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
Back Board
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
S I U I
H S C I
S I U I
H S C I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
Slot No
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
F C S U / F C C U / B S G I / M S G I
F C S U / F C C U / B S G I / M S G I
F C S U / F C C U / B S G I / M S G I
F C S U / F C C U / B S G I / M S G I
F C S U / F C C U / B S G I / M S G I
F C S U / F C C U / B S G I / M S G I
B S G I / M S G I / F C S U / F C C U
B S G I / M S G I / F C S U / F C C U
B S G I / M S G I / F C S U / F C C U
B S G I / M S G I / F C S U / F C C U
B S G I / M S G I / F C S U / F C C U
B S G I / M S G I / F C S U / F C C U
A L U I
Front Board
S M U I
S M U I
U P W R
17
U P W R
18
19
U P W R
20
U P W R
Figure 2-6 Board allocation in the expansion frame
III. Board Configuration Guide of Expansion Frame SMUIs, SIUIs, HSCIs, ALUI, and UPWRs must be configured. SMUIs are configured invariably in the front slots 6 and 8, HSCIs configured in the back slots 7 and 9, ALUI in the front slot 16, and UPWRs in both front and back slots (17, 18) and (19, 20). Slots 0 – 5 and 10 – 15 are available for FCSUs, FCCUs, BSGIs, EPIIs and MSGIs. Number of expansion frames = MAX {ROUNDUP [(number of CDBIs + number of IFMIs + number of FCSUs + number of FCCUs + number of BSGIs + number of MSGIs)/12 - 1], 0}
Note: MAX { } means to get the maximum value. ROUNDUP() means to round up to a integer. For instance, ROUNDUP(0.4) = 1. A maximum of 12 slots are available for CDBIs, IFMIs, FCSUs, FCCUs, BSGIs and MSGIs in an expansion frame.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-9
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
An FCSU and an EPII must be configured in pairs and inserted in the same slots at the front and back. In each expansion frame, it is recommended to configure FCCUs/FCSUs from left to right in the left half and configure BSGIs/MSGIs from right to left in the right half. When empty slots are still left after FCCUs/FCSUs (BSGIs/MSGIs) have been configured in the left (right) half, the empty slots are available for BSGIs/MSGIs (FCCUs/FCSUs). For empty slots without boards configured, it is required to cover them with blank filler s.
2.6.5 Media Resource Frame I. Functions of Media Resource Frame If the capacity of equivalent subscribers is less than 100,000, a media resource frame is configured to provide resource media streams to implement MRS functions.
II. Board Allocation of Media Resource Frame Configuration of front and back boards in a media resource frame is illustrated in Figure 2-7.
Back Board
M R I A
M R I A
M R I A
M R I A
M R I A
M R I A
S I U I
H S C I
S I U I
H S C I
M R I A
M R I A
M R I A
M R I A
M R I A
M R I A
Slot No
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Front Board
M R C A
M R C A
M R C A
M R C A
M R C A
M R C A
S M U I
M R C A
M R C A
M R C A
M R C A
M R C A
M R C A
A L U I
S M U I
U P W R
17
U P W R
18
19
U P W R
20
U P W R
Figure 2-7 Board allocation in a media resource frame
III. Configuration Guide of Media Resource Frame A media resource frame is configured at the near top of the integrated configuration cabinet or of a service processing cabinet. Its frame number is 1 or 5. SMUIs, SIUIs, HSCIs, ALUI, and UPWRs must be configured. SMUIs are configured invariably in the front slots 6 and 8, HSCIs configured in the back slots 7 and 9, ALUI in the front slot 16, and UPWRs in both front and back slots (17, 18) and (19, 20).
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-10
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
A media resource control unit (MRCA) and a media resource interface unit (MRIA) are configured in pairs. The slots 0 – 5 and 10 – 15 are available for them. MRCAs and MRIAs must be configured at the same slot numbers. A maximum of 12 MRCAs and 12 MRIAs can be configured in one frame. Number of media resource frames = ROUNDUP (number of required MRCAs /12) It is recommended to configure MRCAs in available slots from both sides of the frame inwards. For empty slots without boards configured, it is required to cover them with blank filler s.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-11
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Chapter 3 Boards 3.1 Classification of Boards There are three types of boards in SoftX3000: Front board Back board Backplane Both the front boards and the back boards are inserted in the backplane. Table 3-1 lists the functions of the front boards, the back boards, and the backplane. Table 3-1 Functions of boards used in SoftX3000 Board
Function
Front board
Service processing boards and management control board
Back board
Protocol processing boards and interface boards
Backplane
Provides a communication channel for other boards
All SoftX3000 boards are hot-swappable. Some boards have a hot-swapping LED “OFFLINE” on the front and a hot-swapping switch on the ejector-lever. When you insert a board in the frame and restore the ejector lever, the hot-swapping switch is closed. When you push open the ejector lever, the switch is open. Then the MBUS module of the board sends a board-swapping request to the active SMUI in the frame and terminates all services in the board. When the hot-swapping LED is on, you can unplug the board. Figure 3-1 shows the board insertion mode in SoftX3000.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-1
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Backplane
Back board
Front board
Figure 3-1 Front board and back board Table 3-2 lists the boards used in SoftX3000. Table 3-2 List of boards Board
Corresponding front or back board
Frame
Position
FCCU
Basic frame and expansion frame
Front board
FCSU
Basic frame and expansion frame
Front board
EPII
Basic frame and expansion frame
Back board
IFMI
Basic frame
Front board
BFII
Basic frame
Back board
SMUI
Basic frame and expansion frame
Front board
SIUI
Basic frame and expansion frame
Back board
MRCA
Media resource frame
Front board
MRIA
Media resource frame
Back board
BSGI
Basic frame and expansion frame
Front board
None
MSGI
Basic frame and expansion frame
Front board
None
CDBI
Basic frame
Front board
None
Used in pairs
Used in pairs
Used in pairs
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-2
None
Used in pairs
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Board
Chapter 3 Boards
Corresponding front or back board
Frame
Position
ALUI
Basic frame and expansion frame
Front board
None
UPWR
Basic frame and expansion frame
Front or back board
UPWR
HSCI
Basic frame and expansion frame
Back board
None
CKII
Basic frame 0
Back board
None
Note: In the board names, “F” indicates Fixed network, and “I” stands for Integrated.
3.2 ALUI 3.2.1 Functions The Alarm Unit (ALUI) is a front board and installed in slot 16 in each frame. It provides the following functions: Communicating with the SMUI through the serial cable, and accepting the instructions and commands from the SMUI to control indicators. Checking the chassis temperature and reporting the related information to the SMUI through the serial port cable. Collecting fault detection signals and in-position signals of four power modules, reporting the logically synthesized signals as the working status of the power system to the SMUI through the serial port cable, and displaying power board working and in-position status by its indicators. Reporting error information and lighting the fault indicator when the temperature sensor is faulty.
3.2.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of ALUI covers two aspects: Interfaces Power consumption
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-3
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-3 Technical specifications of ALUI Category
Parameter
Specification
Interfaces
RS232 serial port
1
Power consumption
NA
2W
Remark When J5 and J7 in the board are shorted, this serial port is used as RS422 serial port to connect with the SMUI. When J6 and J8 in the board are shorted, this serial port is used as RS232 serial port provided on the front . None
3.2.3 Indicators Figure 3-2 shows the front of the ALUI. ALUI
RUN 00 01 02 03 04 05 07 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 UPWR UPWR
COM
RST
HUAWEI
Figure 3-2 Front of the ALUI Table 3-4 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the ALUI.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-4
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-4 Meanings of indicators on the front of the ALUI Indicat or
Meaning
Status description Red
Green
Off
RUN
Running indicator
Failed to communicate with the SMUI.
The board runs normally.
The board is faulty.
00
Back board 0 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
01
Back board 1 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
02
Back board 2 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
03
Back board 3 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
04
Back board 4 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
05
Back board 5 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
07
Back board 7 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
09
Back board 9 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
10
Back board 10 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
11
Back board 11 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
12
Back board 12 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
13
Back board 13 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
14
Back board 14 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-5
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Indicat or
Chapter 3 Boards
Status description
Meaning
Red
Green
Off
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
15
Back board 15 status indicator
The board faulty.
UPWR
Back power module status indicator
The power module is faulty.
The board runs normally.
The back power module is not in position.
UPWR
Back power module status indicator
The power module is faulty.
The board runs normally.
The back power module is not in position.
is
3.2.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
3.3 BFII 3.3.1 Functions The Back insert FE Interface Unit (BFII) is the back interface board of the IFMI. It is used to implement FE driver processing and enable the external physical interface of the IFMI. The BFII is configured in pair with IFMI. The BFIIs work in active/standby mode.
3.3.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of BFII covers two aspects: Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-5 Technical specifications of BFII Category
Parameter
Specification
Interfaces
10/100-Mbps Ethernet interface
1
Power consumption
NA
2W
3.3.3 Indicators Figure 3-3 shows the front of the BFII. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-6
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
10/100BT
BFII
HUAWEI
Figure 3-3 Front of the BFII
3.3.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers None
3.4 BSGI 3.4.1 Functions The Broadband Signaling Gateway (BSGI) is used to process the IP packets after the IFMI level-1 dispatch. It implements the following protocols: UDP SCTP MTP layer-2 adaptation (M2UA) M3UA V5UA IUA MG H.248
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-7
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
The BSGI then performs level-2 dispatch of such messages to the FCCU or FCSU for processing of transaction layer or service layer. Figure 3-4 shows the protocol stack of the BSGI.
M 2 U A
M 3 U A
V 5 U A
I U A
SCTP
MG Stack
H.248 Stack
UDP
IP BSGI
MAC IFMI
LAN Driver BFII
Figure 3-4 Protocol stack of the BSGI The alarm information generated by the BSGI is reported to the SMUI through the shared resource bus. The BSGIs work in load sharing mode.
3.4.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of BSGI covers three aspects: Functions Interfaces Power consumption
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-8
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-6 Technical specifications of BSGI Category
Functions
Parameter
Specification
Remark
H.248
1800 PPS
PPS means second.
MG
1500 PPS
None
M2UA
5000 PPS
None
M3UA
5000 PPS
None
V5UA
5000 PPS
None
IUA
5000 PPS
None
Interfaces
RS232 serial port
Power consumption
NA
1
16W
3.4.3 Indicators Figure 3-5 shows the front of the BSGI.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-9
packets
per
Used for commissioning; providing RJ45 sockets on the ; provided with hot-swappable protection. None
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
BSGI
ALM RUN
COM
RST
OFFLINE
Figure 3-5 Front of the BSGI Table 3-7 shows the meanings of indicators on the front of the BSGI. Table 3-7 Meanings of indicators on the front of the BSGI Indicator ALM
Meaning Fault indicator
Status description When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty Flashing period for loading program: 0.25 second
RUN
OFFLINE
Running indicator
Plug-in indicator
Flashing period for normal running of the active board: 2 seconds Flashing period for normal running of the standby board: 4 seconds When the board is plugged into a frame, if the blue indicator lights, it means that the board has ed the backplane and the ejector lever on the front can be pressed down to make the board fully inserted into the backplane. While pulling the board out, pull the ejector lever on the front . When the blue indicator lights, it is allowed to pull the board out.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-10
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
3.4.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
3.5 CDBI 3.5.1 Functions The Central Database Boards (CDBIs) are the front boards in basic frame 0 and basic frame 1. As the database of the equipment, the CDBI stores all data of the following aspects: Call location Gateway resources management Outgoing trunk circuit selection The CDBIs work in active/standby mode. At maximum, two pairs of CDBIs can be configured. The alarm information generated by the CDBI is reported to the SMUI through the shared resource bus.
3.5.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of CDBI covers three aspects: Functions Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-8 Technical specifications of CDBI Category
Parameter
Specification
Fixed subscriber locating
9000 times per second
Gateway resource management
5500 times per second
Outgoing trunk circuit selection of local office
6300 times per second
Tandem call circuit selection
4300 times per second
Interfaces
RS232 serial port
1
Power consumption
NA
16W
Functions
Functions
3.5.3 Indicators Figure 3-6 shows the front of the CDBI.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-11
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
CDBI
ALM RUN
COM
RST
OFFLINE
Figure 3-6 Front of the CDBI Table 3-9 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the CDBI. Table 3-9 Meanings of indicators on the front of the CDBI Indicator ALM
Meaning Fault indicator
Status description When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty Flashing period for loading program: 0.25 second
RUN
OFFLINE
Running indicator
Plug-in indicator
Flashing period for normal running of the active board: 2 seconds Flashing period for normal running of the standby board: 4 seconds When the board is plugged into a frame, if the blue indicator lights, it means that the board has ed the backplane and the ejector lever on the front can be pressed down to make the board fully inserted into the backplane. While pulling the board out, pull the ejector lever on the front . When the blue indicator lights, it is allowed to pull the board out.
3.5.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-12
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
3.6 CKII 3.6.1 Functions The Clock Interface Unit (CKII) is a back board of basic frame 0. Each CKII occupies two back slots—15 and 16, or 13 and 14. It provides the following functions: Providing the clock signals in conformity with the specifications of BELLCORE GR-1244-CORE stratum-2 clock, and ITU-T G.812 Type II clock. ing Synchronization Status Message (SSM) function in conformity with the ITU-T G.781 recommendation. Its external synchronous clock interface complying with the requirements of the ITU-T G.703 and ITU-T G.704 templates. The CKIIs work in active/standby mode.
3.6.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of CKII covers two aspects: Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-10 Technical specifications of CKII Category
Interfaces
Power consumption
Parameter
Specification
Remark
2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s clock input interface
2
Used to connect with BITS clock device.
E1 line 2 MHz clock input interface
2
Used to connect with the EPII to extract 2 MHz click signals as reference.
RS422 differential interface
16
8-kHz clock output interface, used to provide clock source for the EPIIs in the expansion frames.
NA
15 W
None
3.6.3 Indicators Figure 3-7 shows the front of the CKII.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-13
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
CKII
RUN ALM ACT BSTS1 BSTS2 LINE1 LINE2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
HUAWEI
Figure 3-7 Front of the CKII
Table 3-11 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the CKII. Table 3-11 Meanings of indicators on the front of the CKII Indicator
Meaning
RUN
Running indicator
ALM
Fault indicator
Status description
Flashing (2 seconds on and 2 seconds off) indicates that the board is to be configured. Flashing (1 second on and 1 second off) indicates that the board runs normally. When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-14
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Indicator
ACT
Chapter 3 Boards
Meaning
Active/stand by status indicator
Status description
When the indicator lights, it indicates the active board is being used. When the indicator is off, it indicates the standby board is being used.
3.6.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
3.7 EPII 3.7.1 Functions The EPII is the E1_Pool Interface Unit, and the back board of the FCSU. The EPII enables the following functions. Processing messages on MTP1 physical layer. Providing narrowband signaling physical interfaces for the FCSU. The EPII is configured in pair with FCSU. Implementing transfer of system clock and enabling clock synchronization function in a frame. Working with the front board FCSU to perform switchover between active and standby boards through H.110 bus. The EPIIs work in active/standby mode.
3.7.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of EPII covers three aspects: Functions Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-12 Technical specifications of EPII Category
Interfaces
Parameter
Specification
Remark
E1 interface
8
Used to connect with narrowband signaling network
8 kHz system clcok input interface
2
Used to connect with the CKII board.
2 MHz BITS clock output interface
2
Used to provide clock source for the CKII board.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-15
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Category
Power consumptio n
Chapter 3 Boards
Parameter
NA
Specification
4W
Remark
None
3.7.3 Indicators Figure 3-8 shows the front of the EPII. EPII
RUN ALM 2M-A
8K-A
2M-B
7 6 5
........... ...............
8
4 3 2 1
8K-B
E1/T1
HUAWEI
Figure 3-8 Front of the EPII
Table 3-13 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the EPII. Table 3-13 Meanings of indicators on the front of the EPII Indicator
Meaning
Status description
ALM
Fault indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is faulty.
RUN
Running indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is running normally.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-16
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
3.7.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers Table 3-14 elaborates the meaning and use of DIP switches S1–S5. Table 3-14 Meaning and usage of DIP switches Switch
Meaning
Switch choice
S1
Trunk cable selecting switch
75-ohm coaxial cable: 8-bit switch "ON"
75-ohm coaxial cable: switch “ON” indicates that the shell of the E1 receiving cable of the EPII is connected to the protection ground.
S2
Used to select whether the shell of the E1 receiving cable of the EPII is connected to the protection ground. Used to select whether the shell of the E1 transmitting cable of the EPII is connected to the protection ground.
75-ohm coaxial cable: switch “ON” indicates that the shell of the E1 transmitting cable of the EPII is connected to the protection ground.
S3
S4
Board switch
reset
S5
Used for commissioning and testing
120-ohm twisted pair: 8-bit switch "OFF"
The default status is “ON”. 120-ohm coaxial cable: switch “OFF” indicates that the shell of the E1 receiving cable of the EPII is not connected to the protection ground.
The default status is “ON”. 120-ohm coaxial cable: switch “OFF” indicates that the shell of the E1 transmitting cable of the EPII is not connected to the protection ground. None
None
3.8 FCCU 3.8.1 Functions The Fixed Calling Control Unit (FCCU) implements call control and processing of the following protocols: MTP3 ISUP INAP MG H.248 H.323 SIP R2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-17
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Digital signaling system No.1 (DSS1) The FCCU also forwards the following types of messages: M3UA ISDN Q.921 adaptation (IUA) V5.2 adaptation (V5UA) Figure 3-9 shows the protocol stack of the FCCU.
ISUP
INAP
DSS1
V5.2
I U A
V 5 U A
MG
H.248
R2
SIP
H.323
TCAP SC
MTP3
M 3 U A
FCCU
MTP2
FCSU
EPII M 2 U A
M 3 U A
I U A
MG Stack
V 5 U A
H.248 Stack
SIP Stack
H.323 RAS
H.323 CALL
BSGI MTP1
SCTP
UDP
MSGI
UDP
T
IP
IP
Figure 3-9 Protocol stack of the FCCU
The FCCU generates and stores bills in its bill pool. Each FCCU can store a maximum of 160,000 bills. The generated bills are transmitted to iGWB in real time. The alarm information generated by the FCCU is reported to the SMUI through the shared resource bus.
Note:
The difference between the FCCU and the FCSU is that the FCSU can process narrowband signaling MTP2 messages while the FCCU cannot.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-18
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
The FCCUs work in active/standby mode.
3.8.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of FCCU covers three aspects: Functions Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-15 Technical specifications of FCCU Category
Parameter
Call processing capability
Maximum number of trunks
Specification
SIP and terminals: kBHCA/pair
H.323 500
MG and terminals: kBHCA/pair
H.248 300
50000/pair Maximum number of subscribers
BHCA is the acronym for Busy Hour Call Attempt.
9000/pair POST subscribers:
Functions
Remark
V5 subscribers: 50000/pair SIP subscribers: 50000/pair
Each FCCU pair can simultaneously 9000 trunks and 50000 subscribers, which is applicable to light-traffic offices. For example, it is required that the BHCA value of the FCCU module is less than 300 k.
H.323 subscribers: 25000/pair Maximum number of IP supermarke ts
90/pair
None
Interfaces
RS232 serial port
1
Used for commissioning; providing RJ45 sockets on the ; provided with hot-swappable protection.
Power consumpti on
NA
16 W
None
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-19
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
3.8.3 Indicators Figure 3-10 shows the front of the FCCU. FCCU
ALM RUN
COM
RST
OFFLINE
Figure 3-10 Front of the FCCU
Table 3-16 shows the meanings of indicators on the front of the FCCU. Table 3-16 Meanings of indicators on the front of the FCCU Indicator
ALM
Meaning
Fault indicator
Status description
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty. Flashing period for loading program: 0.25 second
RUN
Running indicator
Flashing period for normal running of the active board: 2 seconds Flashing period for normal running of the standby board: 4 seconds
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-20
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Indicator
OFFLINE
Chapter 3 Boards
Meaning
Plug-in indicator
Status description
When the board is plugged into a frame, if the blue indicator lights, it means that the board has ed the backplane and the ejector lever on the front can be pressed down to make the board fully inserted into the backplane. To pull the board out, pull the ejector lever on the front . When the blue indicator lights, it is allowed to pull the board out.
3.8.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
Caution:
Never use the reset button RST to reset the board.
Instead, execute the RST BRD command in the maintenance console to ensure that the reset reason information is saved in the BAM.
3.9 FCSU 3.9.1 Functions As the front board, the Fixed Calling Control and Signaling process Unit (FCSU) is used together with the back board EPII in pairs. The FCSU enables the following functions. The FCSU implements processing of call control and protocols, such as MTP3, ISUP, INAP, MG, H.248, H.323, SIP, R2, and DSS1. The FCSU also forwards the M3UA, IUA, and V5UA messages. Figure 3-11 shows the protocol stack of the FCSU.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-21
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
ISUP
INAP
Chapter 3 Boards
DSS1
V5.2
I U A
V 5 U A
MG
H.248
R2
SIP
H.323
TCAP SC
MTP3
M 3 U A
FCCU
MTP2
FCSU
EPII M 2 U A
M 3 U A
I U A
MG Stack
V 5 U A
H.248 Stack
SIP Stack
H.323 RAS
H.323 CALL
BSGI MTP1
SCTP
UDP
MSGI
UDP
T
IP
IP
Figure 3-11 Protocol stack of the FCSU
The FCSU generates and stores bills in its bill pool. Each FCSU can store up to 160,000 bills. The detailed bills are transmitted to iGWB through the shared resource bus for processing. The alarm information generated by the FCSU is reported to the SMUI through the shared resource bus.
Note:
The difference between the FCSU and the FCCU is that the FCSU can process narrowband signaling MTP2 messages while the FCCU cannot.
The FCSUs work in active/standby mode.
3.9.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of FCCU covers three aspects: Functions Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-22
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-17 Technical specifications of FCSU Category
Parameter
Call processing capability
Maximum number of trunks
Specification
SIP and subscribers: kBHCA/pair
H.323 500
MG and terminals: kBHCA/pair
H.248 300
Functions
BHCA is the acronym for Busy Hour Call Attempt.
9000/pair POTS subscribers: 50000/pair
Maximum number of subscribers
Remark
V5 subscribers: 50000/pair SIP subscribers: 50000/pair
Each FCSU pair can simultaneously 9000 trunks and 50000 subscribers, which is applicable to light-traffic offices. For example, it is required that the BHCA value of the FCSU module is less than 300 k.
H.323 subscribers: 25000/pair Maximum number of IP supermarket s
90/pair
None
Number of 64 kbit/s links
32
None
Number of 2 Mbit/s links
2
None
Interfaces
RS232 serial port
1
Used for debugging; providing RJ45 sockets on the ; provided with hot-swappable protection.
Power consumptio n
NA
26 W
None
3.9.3 Indicators Figure 3-12 shows the front of the FCSU.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-23
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
FCSU
ALM RUN
COM
RST
OFFLINE
Figure 3-12 Front of the FCSU
Table 3-18 shows the meanings of indicators on the front of the FCSU. Table 3-18 Meanings of indicators on the front of the FCSU Indicator
ALM
Meaning
Fault indicator
Status description
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty Flashing period for loading program: 0.25 second
RUN
OFFLINE
Running indicator
Plug-in indicator
Flashing period for normal running of the active board: 2 seconds Flashing period for normal running of the standby board: 4 seconds When the board is plugged into a frame, if the blue indicator lights, it means that the board has ed the backplane and the ejector lever on the front can be pressed down to make the board fully inserted into the backplane. While pulling the board out, pull the ejector lever on the front . When the blue indicator lights, it is allowed to pull the board out.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-24
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
3.9.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
Caution:
Never use the reset button RST to reset the board.
Instead, execute the RST BRD command in the maintenance console to ensure that the reset reason information is saved in the BAM.
3.10 HSCI 3.10.1 Functions The Hot-Swap and Control Unit (HSCI) is a back board. One pair of HSCIs is installed in the back slots 7 and 9 in each frame. It provides the following functions: Bridging between left and right shared resource buses, to ensure that the SMUIs in slots 6 and 8 can manage the front boards (except ALUI and UPWR) of the frame. Switching of Ethernet buses in the frame. Board hot swap control. Board power-on control. Providing two pairs of heartbeat detection interfaces for the SMUI and HSCI. Providing a 10/100 Mbit/s auto-sensing Ethernet connection between the active and the standby SMUI. Providing six external FE interfaces. The HSCIs work in active/standby mode.
3.10.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of HSCI covers two aspects: Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-19 Technical specifications of HSCI Category
Interfaces
Parameter
10/100-Mbit/s Ethernet interface
Specification
6
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-25
Remark
Provided on the fornt
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Category
Power consumption
Parameter
NA
Specification
16W
Remark
None
3.10.3 Indicators Figure 3-13 shows the front of the HSCI.
10/100BT1 10/100BT2
10/100BT3
10/100BT4 10/100BT5 10/100BT6
HSCI
DOMA DOMB
HUAWEI
Figure 3-13 Front of the HSCI
Table 3-20 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the HSCI.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-26
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-20 Meanings of indicators on the front of the HSCI Indicator
Meaning
Status description
DOMA
Bus domain indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the corresponding SMUI controls the shared resource buses in domain A.
DOMB
Bus domain indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the corresponding SMUI controls the shared resource buses in domain B.
LINK
Network port connection indicator
There are six LINK indicators. The indicators are always on as long as the physical connection is normal; otherwise they are off.
Network interface data flow indicator
There are six ACT indicators. When the indicator flashes, it indicates that some data is being received or transmitted The flashing frequency indicates the size of data flow. Fast flashing means the data flow is large, and slow flashing indicates that the data flow is small.
ACT
3.10.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers None
3.11 IFMI 3.11.1 Functions The IP Forward Module (IFMI) boards are the front boards in basic frame 0 and basic frame 1, and used together with the back board PFII in pairs. The IFMI is used to receive and transmit IP packets, process Media Access Control (MAC) layer messages, distribute IP messages and provide IP interfaces together with the BFII. The alarm information generated by the IFMI is reported to the SMUI through the shared resource bus. The IFMIs work in active/standby mode.
3.11.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of IFMI covers three aspects: Functions Interfaces Power consumption
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-27
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-21 Technical specifications of IFMI Category
Parameter
Specification
Remark
Functions
IP packet forwarding capability
32000 bit/s /pair
None
Interfaces
RS232 serial port
1
Used for commissioning; providing RJ45 sockets on the ; provided with hot-swappable protection.
Power consumpti on
NA
16W
None
3.11.3 Indicators Figure 3-14 shows the front of the IFMI. IFMI
LINK ACT
ALM RUN COM
RST
OFFLINE
Figure 3-14 Front of the IFMI
Table 3-22 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the IFMI.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-28
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-22 Meanings of indicators on the front of the IFMI Indicator
LINK
Meaning
Network interface connection indicator. Two available.
ACK
The indicator is always on when the physical connection is normal; otherwise it is off. are
Network interface data flow indicator. Two available.
ALM
Status description
are
Fault indicator
When the indicator flashes, it indicates that some data is being received or transmitted The flashing frequency indicates the size of the data flow. When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty Flashing period for loading program: 0.25 second
RUN
OFFLINE
Running indicator
Plug-in indicator
Flashing period for normal running: 0.5 second Flashing period for normal running of the standby board: 4 seconds When the board is plugged into a frame, if the blue indicator lights, it means that the board has ed the backplane and the ejector lever on the front can be pressed down to make the board fully inserted into the backplane. While pulling the board out, pull the ejector lever on the front . When the blue indicator lights, it is allowed to pull the board out.
3.11.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
3.12 SIUI 3.12.1 Functions The System Interface Unit (SIUI) is the back-insert interface board of the SMUI, and the SIUIs are installed in back slots 6 and 8 of the frame. Its functions are as follows. Providing
the
SMUI with
Ethernet interface. The
SIUI
is
configured
correspondingly to the SMUI one by one. Implementing level conversion for two asynchronous serial port signals from the front board, and providing physical interfaces for three asynchronous serial ports. Identifying frame ID through setting the DIP switches. The SIUIs work in active/standby mode. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-29
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
3.12.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of SIUI covers two aspects: Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-23 Technical specifications of SIUI Category
Parameter
Interfaces
10/100-Mbps Ethernet interface
Specification
Remark
2
Connected with the HSCIs in slots 7 and 9.
Interfaces
RS485 interface
2
Implementing RS485 level conversion for the asynchronous serial port signals from the system boards and providing two physical interfaces for the asynchronous serial port to connect with the power distribution monitoring system.
Power consumpti on
NA
4W
None
3.12.3 Indicators Figure 3-15 shows the front of the SIUI.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-30
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
SIUI
10/100BT2
COM3+
COM3
10/100BT1
HD
HUAWEI
Figure 3-15 Front of the SIUI
3.12.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers The SIUI provides an 8-bit DIP switch S3, used for setting unit frame IDs. Table 3-24 shows the corresponding settings. Table 3-24 Table of SIUI switch corresponding to frame ID Switch bit Frame ID
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
1
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
2
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
on
3
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
4
on
on
on
on
on
off
on
on
5
on
on
on
on
on
off
on
off
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-31
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Switch bit
8
Frame ID
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
on
7
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
8
on
on
on
on
off
on
on
on
9
on
on
on
on
off
on
on
off
10
on
on
on
on
off
on
off
on
11
on
on
on
on
off
on
off
off
12
on
on
on
on
off
off
on
on
13
on
on
on
on
off
off
on
off
14
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
on
15
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
16
on
on
on
off
on
on
on
on
17
on
on
on
off
on
on
on
off
3.13 SMUI 3.13.1 Functions The System Management Unit (SMUI) is the main control board of a frame, and the units are installed in slots 6 and 8 in each OSTA frame. As the front boards, the SMUIs are used together with the back boards SIUIs in pairs, with the following functions. Configuring shared resource buses and managing their status. Managing all boards in the frame, reporting their status to BAM and controlling the status of the indicators on the front of the ALUI through serial port bus and shared resource bus. Loading and managing system program and data. The SMUIs work in active/standby mode.
3.13.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of SMUI covers two aspects: Interfaces Power consumption
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-32
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-25 Technical specifications of SMUI Category
Interfaces
Power consumpti on
Parameter
Specification
Remark
RS232 serial port
1
Used for commissioning; providing RJ45 sockets on the ; provided with hot-swappable protection.
RS422 master/slave serial port
1
Providing physical interfaces together with the SIUI.
Asynchronous serial port for TTL level
1
Used to connect with the monitoring board in the fan frame.
NA
14W
None
3.13.3 Indicators Figure 3-16 shows the front of the SMUI. SMUI
LINK ACT
RST
ALM RUN
COM
DOMA DOMB
HUAWEI
Figure 3-16 Front of the SMUI
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-33
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-26 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the SMUI. Table 3-26 Meanings of indicators on the front of the SMUI Indicator
Meaning
Status description
LINK
Network port connection indicator
The indicator is always on when the physical connection is normal; otherwise it is off.
ACT
Network port data flow indicator
When the indicator flashes, it indicates that some data is being received or transmitted The flashing frequency indicates the size of the data flow.
ALM
Fault indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty Flashing period for loading program: 0.25 second
RUN
Running indicator
Flashing period for normal running of the active board: 2 seconds Flashing period for normal running of the standby board: 4 seconds
DOMA
Bus domain indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the SMUI in domain A controls the shared resource buses.
DOMB
Bus domain indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the SMUI in domain B controls the shared resource buses.
3.13.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
3.14 MRCA 3.14.1 Functions The Media Resource Control Unit (MRCA) is the front board in the resource expansion frame, and used in pair with the back board MRIA. Each MRCA can function as independent media resource server. The MRCA processes the audio signals in real time. It collects and generates DTMF signals, plays and records audio clips and provides multi-party conference function. The MRCAs work in load sharing mode.
3.14.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of MRCA covers three aspects: Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-34
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Functions Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-27 Technical specifications of MRCA Category
Parameter
Specification
Functions
Processing capacity
240 channels/board
Interfaces
RS232 serial port
1
Power consumption
None
40 W
3.14.3 Indicators Figure 3-17 shows the front of the MRCA. MRCA
ALM RUN
COM
RST
OFFLINE
Figure 3-17 Front of the MRCA
Table 3-28 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the MRCA. Table 3-28 Meanings of indicators on the front of the MRCA Indicator
ALM
Meaning
Fault indicator
Status description
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-35
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Indicator
Chapter 3 Boards
Meaning
Status description
Flashing period for loading program: 0.25 second RUN
OFFLINE
Running indicator
Plug-in indicator
Flashing period for normal running of the active board: 2 seconds Flashing period for normal running of the standby board: 4 seconds When the board is plugged into a frame, if the blue indicator lights, it means that the board has ed the backplane and the ejector lever on the front can be pressed down to make the board fully inserted into the backplane. When pulling the board out, pull the ejector lever on the front . When the blue indicator lights, it is allowed to pull the board out.
3.14.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers None
3.15 MRIA 3.15.1 Functions The Media Resource Interface Unit (MRIA) is the back board of the MRCA, providing 10/100-Mbps interface for the external media streams.
3.15.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of MRIA covers three aspects: Functions Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-29 Technical specifications of MRIA Category
Parameter
Specification
Remark
Functions
10/100-Mbit/s Ethernet interface
2
Used to transfer media streams.
Interfaces
RS232 port
2
None
Power consumption
NA
2W
None
serial
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-36
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
3.15.3 Indicators Figure 3-18 shows the front of the MRIA.
10/100BT
10/100 BASE-T
COM
10/100BT
10/100 BASE-T
COM
MRIA
HUAWEI
Figure 3-18 Front of the MRIA
On the MRIA, there are two groups of interfaces, and each group has three interfaces: the upper interface is the serial port for commissioning, the middle one is the 10/100 Mbit/s network interface for stream transmission and the lower one is reserved for future use.
3.15.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers None
3.16 MSGI 3.16.1 Functions The Multimedia Signaling Gateway Unit (MSGI) processes the following protocols: Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-37
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
UDP T H.323 (including H.323 RAS and H.323 Call Signaling) SIP Figure 3-19 shows the protocol stack of the MSGI. FCCU/FCSU H.323
H.323 RAS SIP Stack
H.323 CALL
UDP
T
MSGI
IP
MAC IFMI
LAN Driver BFII
Figure 3-19 Protocol stack of the MSGI
The MSGIs work in active/standby mode. The alarm information generated by the MSGI is reported to the SMUI through the shared resource bus.
Note:
When the BHCA of the system is less than 400,000 or the number of equivalent subscribers is less than 50,000, it is not necessary to configure the MSGI. The configured IFMIs can provide all features of MSGI.
3.16.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of MSGI covers three aspects: Functions Interfaces
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-38
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Power consumption Table 3-30 Technical specifications of MSGI Category
Parameter
Specification
SIP
1000 PPS
H.323 CALL Signaling
866 PPS
H.323 RAS
1111 PPS
Interfaces
RS232 serial port
1
Power consumption
NA
16W
Functions
3.16.3 Indicators Figure 3-20 shows the front of the MSGI.
MSGI
ALM RUN
COM
RST
OFFLINE
Figure 3-20 Front of the MSGI
Table 3-31 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the MSGI.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-39
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-31 Meanings of indicators on the front of the MSGI Indicator
ALM
Meaning
Fault indicator
Status description
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty Flashing period for loading program: 0.25 second
RUN
OFFLINE
Running indicator
Plug-in indicator
Flashing period for normal running of the active board: 2 seconds Flashing period for normal running of the standby board: 4 seconds When the board is plugged into a frame, if the blue indicator lights, it means that the board has ed the backplane and the ejector lever on the front can be pressed down to make the board fully inserted into the backplane. While pulling the board out, pull the ejector lever on the front . When the blue indicator lights, it is allowed to pull the board out.
3.16.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
3.17 UPWR 3.17.1 Functions The Universal Power (UPWR) can be a front board or a back board. It provides power supply for all the other boards in the frame. Each UPWR occupies two slots—in front slots 17 and 18 or back slots 19 and 20 of each frame. The ALUI collects the information of the UPWR through the serial cable embedded in the backplane, and drives the indicators on the ALUI to indicate the working status of the UPWR. The UPWR adopts the 2+2 backup working mode.
3.17.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of ALUI covers three aspects: Functions Interfaces Power consumption
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-40
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-32 Technical specifications of ALUI Category
Specification
Remark
Input voltage
From –76 V to –36 V
The output currents for the voltages are 50 A, 40 A, 8 A and 4 A respectively.
Output voltage
3.3V, 5V, ±12V
None
Interfaces
Indication interface for power output failure and in-position power unit
1
None
Power consumpti on
NA
20W
None
Voltage
Parameter
3.17.3 Indicators Figure 3-21 shows the front of the UPWR. UPW R
ALM RU N
HUAW EI
Figure 3-21 Front of the UPWR
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-41
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-33 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the UPWR. Table 3-33 Meanings of indicators on the front of the UPWR Indicator
Meaning
Status description
ALM
Power fault indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the power module is in faulty status.
RUN
Power running indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the power module works normally.
3.17.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers None
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-42
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Chapter 4 Cables 4.1 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable Power cables are used to supply power to a cabinet and its components. The protection grounding cables of various components in a cabinet are interconnected through the grounding bars in the cabinet. Through the protection grounding cables of the cabinet, the grounding bars are connected to the protection ground (PGND) of the DC power distribution cabinet, which is connected with the protection grounding bus in the equipment room. In addition, all cabinets are interconnected by protection grounding cables as an equipotential system. The power cables and protection grounding cables of a cabinet and its components include the following: z
Input power cable and protection grounding cable for cabinet
z
Protection grounding cable for power distribution frame (connected before delivery)
z
Power cable and protection grounding cable for service frame
z
Power cable and protection grounding cable for KVMS switcher
z
Power cable and protection grounding cable for local area network (LAN) Switch
z
Power cable and protection grounding cable for hard disk array (only when iGWB uses IBM server)
z
Power cable and protection grounding cable for iGateway Bill (iGWB)/background module (BAM) server
z
Power cable and protection grounding cable for media resource server (MRS)
z
Protection grounding cable for interconnection of grounding bars between adjacent cabinets
z
Protection grounding cable for cabinet body
Among these cables, the input power cables for cabinets connect SoftX3000 cabinets and the direct current (DC) power distribution cabinet in the equipment room, while the other power cables connect the output terminals of the power distribution cabinet and the input terminals of the corresponding components and frames.
4.1.1 Input Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for Cabinet The input power cables of each SoftX3000 cabinet include two –48 V cables (blue) and two backhaul ground (BGND) cables (black), equipped with one PGND cable (yellow). Refer to Table 4-1 for the cross-sectional area of these cables.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-1
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Table 4-1 Cross-sectional area of power cables and protection grounding cables between DC power distribution cabinet and SoftX3000 cabinets Name
Specifications 2
–48 V power cable (blue)
25 mm –copper core wire–two-channel
BGND cable (black)
25 mm –copper core wire–two-channel
PGND cable (yellow or olivine)
25 mm –copper core wire
2 2
For a power cable, the end connected to the input terminal of the power distribution frame is a cold end terminal (as shown in Figure 4-1), and the other end is usually an OT terminal. The two ends of a PGND cable use OT terminals, as shown in Figure 4-2. OT terminals should be connected after completion of cabling on site. Refer to Appendix D of U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Installation Manual–Hardware Installation for the connection method.
Figure 4-1 Schematic diagram of a cold end terminal
Figure 4-2 Schematic diagram of an OT terminal
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-2
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Note: If the cross-sectional area of the existing cables does not meet the design requirement, you can connect two or more cables in parallel for use. For example, if 240-mm2 power cables are required but only 120-mm2 power cables are available, you can connect two 120-mm2 power cables to be used as one cable.
4.1.2 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cables for Service Frame Each service frame has one input power cable when single power supply is adopted, and has two input power cables when dual power supplies are adopted. The power cables that are connected to the service frames in different locations have different lengths. Figure 4-3 shows the appearance of a power cable of a service frame.
Figure 4-3 Appearance of a power cable for a service frame The model of such power cable is UL1015, and its cross-sectional area is 10 American Wire Gauge (AWG, about 5.3 mm2). The end connecting to a power distribution frame has two cold end terminals (X2, X4), and the other end connecting to a service frame has two OT terminals (X1, X3). The blue cable is –48 V cable, and the black one is BGND cable. Each service frame is equipped with two olivine 10-AWG protection grounding cables, with both ends using OT terminals for connecting the two grounding terminals of a service frame to the grounding bars at both sides of a cabinet.
4.1.3 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for KVMS Switcher The power cables for a KVMS switcher are made of 16-AWG UL1015 wires (with the cross-sectional area about 1.3 mm2). One end connected to a power distribution frame has two cold end terminals and the other end for power input has two OT terminals. The blue cable is –48 V cable, and the black one is GND cable. See Figure 4-4 for the appearance of such power cable.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-3
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Figure 4-4 Appearance of a KVMS power cable KVMS is equipped with an olivine 14-AWG protection grounding cable (with the cross-sectional area about 2.1 mm2) for connecting the grounding terminals of KVMS with the grounding bars at both sides of a cabinet. See Figure 4-5 for the appearance of the protection grounding cable of KVMS. The UT terminal connects to the KVMS grounding point, and the OT terminal connects to the grounding bar.
Figure 4-5 Appearance of a KVMS protection grounding cable
4.1.4 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for LAN Switch The power cables for LAN Switch are made of 16-AWG UL1015 wires, and both ends are cold end terminals. See Figure 4-6 for the appearance of such power cable.
Figure 4-6 Appearance of a power cable of LAN Switch The protection grounding cable for LAN Switch uses 14-AWG UL1015 wire, with both ends being OT terminals, one end of which is connected to the grounding terminal on the back of a LAN Switch and the other end is grounded locally.
4.1.5 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for HP Server The input power socket is at the very right side of the back of HP server. It supplies dual power with two power modules. The power cable and protection grounding cable are both UL1015 cable with cross-sectional area of 12 AWG (about 3.3 mm2). Figure 4-7 shows the appearance. The cables connect the server with a female connector 3V3 (x1) at one end; at the other end are power cables and protection grounding cables. The power cables use two cold end terminals (x3, x4), with blue cables being -48V cables, and black cables being GND cables. The olivine protection grounding cables use OT terminals (x2) at both ends.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-4
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
(1) Female connector 3V3
Chapter 4 Cables
(2) OT terminal
(3) Cold end terminal
(4)Main label
Figure 4-7 Appearance of power cables and protection grounding cables for HP server
4.1.6 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for IBM Server The power cables for iGWB and BAM server are made of 16-AWG UL1015 wires (with the cross-sectional area about 1.3 mm2). The end connected to a power distribution frame is a cold end terminal, and the power input end is a UT terminal. The grounding cable connects the server by UT terminal and connects the grounding busbar by OT terminal. The blue cable is –48 V cable, and the black one is GND cable. Figure 4-8 shows the appearance of such cable.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-5
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Figure 4-8 Appearance of a power cables and protection grounding cables for IBM Server
4.1.7 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for Hard Disk Array When iGWB uses IBM server, you need to configure IBM EXP400 disk array, which can supply dual power with two power modules. The power cable and protection grounding cable for hard disk array are provided by the manufacturer of hard disk array. The cable color definition is different from Huawei’s specification. The end connected to a power distribution frame is a cold end terminal, on which the blue cable is labeled “–48V”, the brown end is labeled “GND”, and the olivine one is labeled “PGND”. The appearance of the cables is shown in Figure 4-9.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-6
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Figure 4-9 Appearance of power cables and grounding cables for hard disk array
4.1.8 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for MRS The MRS is installed in the MRS cabinet independently with dual power supplies. The cross-sectional area of its power cable is AWG10. See Figure 4-10 for the appearance of the power cable.
Figure 4-10 Appearance of power cables of MRS The PGND cable is an olivine AWG10 cable, with both ends being OT terminals. The power cable and protection grounding cable are both 4.27 m in length.
4.1.9 Other Protection Grounding Cables I. Protection Grounding Cables Between SoftX3000 Cabinets The protection grounding cables between adjacent SoftX3000 cabinets are interconnected on the upper, middle, and lower points of a grounding bar. The protection grounding cable is UL1015 cable with cross-sectional area of 10 AWG, in total length of 300 mm, and with OT terminals at both ends.
II. Protection Grounding Cables for Cabinet Doors The protection grounding cables for doors are used to connect the grounding terminals on the base of a cabinet and the front and back doors as well as side s of the cabinet. The protection grounding cable is UL1015 cable with cross-sectional area of 10 AWG and OT terminals at both ends. One such cable is configured for each door. The protection grounding cables for the front and back doors are 300 mm long, and those for the side s are 250 mm long.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-7
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
III. Protection Grounding Cables for Power Distribution Frames (Connected before Delivery) The protection grounding cable for a power distribution frame is used to connect the grounding terminal of the power distribution frame and the grounding bar of a cabinet. The protection grounding cable is UL1015 cable with cross-sectional area of 10 AWG, in total length of 250 mm, and with OT terminals at both ends.
IV. Protection Grounding Cables from Grounding Bar to Cabinet Body (Connected before Delivery) This protection grounding cable is used to connect the grounding terminal at the top or bottom of a cabinet and the grounding bar of the cabinet. The protection grounding cable is ZRA VV cable with cross-sectional area of 10 mm2, in total length of 300 mm, and with OT terminals at both ends.
4.2 Internal Signal Cable The internal signal cables that need to be installed on site include the following: z
Straight through cable
z
FE signal cable
z
Serial port cable between iGWB servers
z
Data cable between iGWB server and hard disk array (only when iGWB uses IBM server)
z
Server/switcher cable
z
Serial port cable for monitoring power distribution frame
z
Internal clock cable (optional)
4.2.1 Straight Through Cable I. Classification and Function of Straight Through Cable SoftX3000 uses the following straight through cables: z
Straight through cable between LAN Switches
To ensure that LAN Switches work in dual backup mode, the two S3528G LAN Switches in the integrated configuration cabinet need to be interconnected through three straight through cables in view of security. The straight through cable is used to transmit heartbeat detection signals so as to complete dual backup of data. z
Straight through cable between iGWB/BAM and LAN Switch
The integrated configuration cabinet has three servers: two iGWB servers and one BAM server. Each server uses two straight through cables to connect with the active and standby LAN Switches. z
Straight through cable between board in service frame and LAN Switch
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-8
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
The ports marked 10/100BT6 at the uppermost position of the active and standby HSCIs are connected to the active and standby LAN Switches respectively through straight through cables, implementing the communication between the service processing subsystem and BAM, and the interconnection between the service processing frames. Straight through cable between MRS and LAN Switch
z
The communication between iGWB/BAM, boards in a service frame, and MRS is implemented through LAN Switch. FE signal cable between HSCI and SIUI
z
FE signal cable is straight through cable, used to connect the HSCI (a bridge board) and the SIUI (a back board of the system board).
II. Appearance of Straight Through Cable Figure 4-11 shows the appearance of a straight through cable. Its both ends are shielded crystal connectors, and category-5 shielded twisted pair is used as the cable material.
Figure 4-11 Appearance of a straight through cable
III. Connection of Straight Through Cable See Table 4-2 for the cable connections at both ends. Table 4-2 Connections of straight through cables X1
X2
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
Remark A twisted pair
A twisted pair
A twisted pair
A twisted pair
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-9
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Note: Both the BAM server and emergency workstation are connected to the HUB through straight through cables, so that the emergency workstation can back up the data in the BAM periodically. In addition, you need to lay two straight through cables between the emergency workstation and LAN Switches in advance. When the BAM is working normally, these two cables are disconnected with LAN Switches. However, once the BAM is faulty, immediately connect these two cables with the active and standby LAN Switches respectively to make the emergency workstation take over the job of the BAM.
4.2.2 Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers (HP Server) I. Functions of Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers (HP Server) To ensure the dual backup working mode and security of the iGWB servers, it is required to connect the two iGWB servers in the integrated configuration cabinet through a serial port cable, which forms the second heartbeat signal path between the active and standby iGWBs.
Note： The active and standby iGWB servers connect to the bill console or NMS device through the HUB. The external network cable connecting to the HUB acts as the first heartbeat signal path between the active and standby iGWB servers.
II. Appearance and Architecture of Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers The serial port cable is a four-core round shielded serial port cable, with the cross-sectional area of 26 AWG and DB9 female connector at both ends. Figure 4-12 shows the appearance.
(1)Main label
Figure 4-12 Appearance of a serial port cable connecting two iGWBs (HP server)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-10
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
III. Connections of Serial Port Cables Between HP Servers Table 4-3 shows the connections of serial port cables between HP servers. Table 4-3 Connections of serial port cables between HP servers X1
X2
Color
2
3
Red
3
2
Yellow
5
5
Black
4.2.3 Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers (IBM Server) I. Functions of Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers To ensure the dual backup working mode and security of the iGWB servers, it is required to connect the two iGWB servers in the integrated configuration cabinet through a serial port cable, which forms the second heartbeat signal path between the active and standby iGWBs.
Note: The active and standby iGWB servers connect to the bill console or NMS device through the HUB. The external network cable connecting to the HUB acts as the first heartbeat signal path between the active and standby iGWB servers.
II. Appearance and Architecture of Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers This serial port cable is an enhanced C5 eight-core shielded twisted-pair cable, with the cross-sectional area of 24 AWG and RJ45 crystal connectors at both ends. See Figure 4-13 for its appearance. Table 4-4 illustrates the cable connection relations at both ends.
(1) Main label
Figure 4-13 Appearance of a serial port cable connecting two iGWBs
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-11
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Table 4-4 Connections of serial port cables between IBM servers X1
X2
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
4
5
5
6
3
7
2
8
1
4.2.4 Data Cable Between iGWB Server and Hard Disk Array I. Functions of Data Cable Between iGWB Server and Hard Disk Array When iGWB uses IBM server, you need to configure IBM EXP400 disk array. Two SCSI data cables between two iGWB servers and the hard disk array are provided by the manufacturer of the hard disk array. One end of the data cable connects with the SCSI slot on an iGWB server, and the other end connects to the SCSI socket on the upper part of the hard disk array.
II. Appearance and Architecture of Data Cable Between iGWB Server and Hard Disk Array The SCSI data cable adopts 68-pin and very high density connector interface (VHDCI) connectors, as shown in Figure 4-14.
Figure 4-14 Appearance of an SCSI data cable
4.2.5 Server/Switcher Cable I. Functions of Server/Switcher Cable Server/switcher cables include keyboard cable, mouse cable, and display cable, which are delivered together with a server and used to connect the KVMS and iGWB/BAM server. The KVMS switches the keyboard signals, mouse signals, and video signals connected with different servers.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-12
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
II. Appearance and Architecture of Server/Switcher Cable Keyboard and mouse cables use PS/2 connectors. See Figure 4-15 for its appearance.
Figure 4-15 Appearance of keyboard and mouse signal cables Both ends of a display signal cable use DB15 male connectors, as shown in Figure 4-16.
Figure 4-16 Appearance of a display signal cable
4.2.6 Serial Port Cable for Monitoring Power Distribution Frame I. Functions of Serial Port Cable for Monitoring Power Distribution Frame The system management unit (SMUI) in a service frame is responsible for monitoring the signals of a power distribution frame. On the monitor board of the power distribution frame, there are two RS485 serial ports serving as the active and standby power monitor ports, which are connected with the active and standby monitor ports of the SIUI of the service frame through the serial port cables to send the monitor signals of the power distribution frame to the BAM. Each cabinet is connected with two serial port cables for monitoring.
II. Appearance and Architecture of Serial Port Cable for Monitoring Power Distribution Frame Both ends of a monitor cable are shielded crystal connectors with lockers for ensuring reliable connections, and category-5 shielded twisted pair is adopted as cable material. See Figure 4-17 for the appearance of the cable, and Figure 4-17 for the connection relations.
Figure 4-17 Appearance of a serial port cable for monitoring power distribution frame Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-13
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
III. Connection of Serial Port Cable for Monitoring Power Distribution Frame Table 4-5 Connections of serial port cable for monitoring the PDF Connector 1
Connector 2
Name of signal
X1.1
X2.1
TX+
X1.2
X2.2
TX-
X1.4
X2.4
RX+
X1.5
X2.5
RX-
Wire pair A twisted pair
A twisted pair
4.2.7 Internal Clock Cable I. Classification of Clock Cables The clock cables of SoftX3000 can be divided into two types: internal clock cable and external clock cable. The internal clock cable is used to connect the EPII and CKII boards, and the external clock cable is used to connect the CKII board and the building integrated timing supply system (BITS) device, as shown in Figure 4-18. External clock cable
BITS
BITS
2MHz clock cable
C K I I
C K I I
Active
8kHz clock cable
E P I I
E P I I
Active Standby
Active
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
The basic frame configured with CKIIs in an integrated configuration cabinet
Active Active Standby Standby
8kHz clock cable
... Service frames without CKIIs
E P I I
E P I I
Active Standby
Figure 4-18 Connection relations of clock cables
II. Internal Clock Cable There are two kinds of internal clock cables: 2-MHz clock cable and 8-kHz clock cable. The 2-MHz clock cable imports synchronous clock signals from the active EPII to the CKII. The 8-kHz clock cable provides 8-kHz clock signals to the frames without CKIIs.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-14
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
III. Appearance and Architecture of Internal Clock Cable The 2-MHz clock cable is double-layer shielded coaxial cable and its two shielding layers are connected. Both ends use 75-ohm sub-miniature B (SMB) connectors. Figure 4-19 shows its appearance.
Figure 4-19 Appearance of a 2-MHz clock cable The 8-kHz clock cable is twisted pair with shielded crystal connectors at both ends. Its appearance is the same as a straight through cable, as shown in Figure 4-11.
IV. Connections of Internal Clock Cable Table 4-6 shows the connections of an 8-kHz clock cable. Table 4-6 Connections of a 8-kHz clock cable Connector 1
Connector 2
X1.1
X2.1
X1.2
X2.2
Wire pair A twisted pair
4.3 External Signal Cable The external signal cables of SoftX3000 include: z
Trunk cable
z
External clock cable
z
External network cable
The external clock cable and trunk cable are configured based on the actual networking.
4.3.1 Trunk Cable between SoftX3000 and Digital Distribution Frame The trunk cables used in SoftX3000 are of two types: 75-ohm E1 cable and 120-ohm E1 cable. Both types adopt DB50 high-density connectors with lockers for fixing.
I. 75-ohm E1 Cable The 75-ohm E1 cable is eight-core coaxial cable with braided shielding layer and jacket. Each DB50 connector provides two eight-core cables, and the shielding layer is spliced with the metal envelop of the DB connector. Each trunk cable is used to transmit eight channels of E1 signals. Figure 4-20 shows the appearance of a 75-ohm E1 trunk cable.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-15
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
1) DB50 male connector
2) Main label
3) Label
4) Small label
Figure 4-20 Appearance of a 75-ohm trunk cable The wire order is distinguished by the digits on the cores. Table 4-7 shows the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable connector.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-16
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Table 4-7 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable connector Wire No. W2.8
W2.7
W2.6
W2.5
W2.4
W2.3
W2.2
W2.1
Pin No.
Signal
X0.2
X1.Tip
X0.3
X1.Ring
X0.5
X2.Tip
X0.6
X2.Ring
X0.8
X3.Tip
X0.9
X3.Ring
X0.11
X4.Tip
X0.12
X4.Ring
X0.14
X5.Tip
X0.15
X5.Ring
X0.17
X6.Tip
X0.18
X6.Ring
X0.20
X7.Tip
X0.21
X7.Ring
X0.23
X8.Tip
X0.24
X8.Ring
Channel No. CHAN7 Tx
CHAN7 Rx
CHAN6 Tx
CHAN6 Rx
CHAN5 Tx
CHAN5 Rx
CHAN4 Tx
CHAN4 Rx
Wire No. W1.8
W1.7
W1.6
W1.5
W1.4
W1.3
W1.2
W1.1
Pin No.
Signal
X0.27
X9.Tip
X0.28
X9.Ring
X0.30
X10.Tip
X0.31
X10.Ring
X0.33
X11.Tip
X0.34
X11.Ring
X0.36
X12.Tip
X0.37
X12.Ring
X0.39
X13.Tip
X0.40
X13.Ring
X0.42
X14.Tip
X0.43
X14.Ring
X0.45
X15.Tip
X0.46
X15.Ring
X0.48
X16.Tip
X0.49
X16.Ring
Channel No. CHAN3 Tx
CHAN3 Rx
CHAN2 Tx
CHAN2 Rx
CHAN1 Tx
CHAN1 Rx
CHAN0 Tx
CHAN0 Rx
II. 120-ohm E1 Cable The 120-ohm E1 cable is composed of eight pairs of twisted pairs with braided shielding layer and jacket. Each DB50 connector provides two 8-pair twisted pairs, and the shielding layer is spliced with the metal envelop of the DB connector. Each trunk cable is used to transmit eight channels of E1 signals. Figure 4-21 shows the appearance of a 120-ohm E1 trunk cable.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-17
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Figure 4-21 Appearance of a 120-ohm trunk cable The wire order is distinguished by the digits on the cores. Table 4-8 shows the pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable connector.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-18
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Table 4-8 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable connector Wire pair No. 8
7
6
5
4
3
Pin No.
Signal
Remark
Channel No.
Wire pair No.
Pin No.
Signal
Remark
X0.27
TxTip7
Red core
Green core
X0.28
TxRing7
Green core
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.29
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.5
RxTip7
Red core
X0.30
RxTip7
Red core
X0.6
RxRing7
Orange core
X0.31
RxRing7
Orange core
X0.7
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.32
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.8
TxTip6
Red core
X0.33
TxTip6
Red core
X0.9
TxRing6
Blue core
X0.34
TxRing6
Blue core
X0.10
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.35
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.11
RxTip6
White core
X0.36
RxTip6
White core
X0.12
RxRing6
Gray core
X0.37
RxRing6
Gray core
X0.13
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.38
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.14
TxTip5
White core
X0.39
TxTip5
White core
X0.15
TxRing5
Brown core
X0.40
TxRing5
Brown core
X0.16
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.41
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.17
RxTip5
White core
X0.42
RxTip5
White core
X0.18
RxRing5
Green core
X0.43
RxRing5
Green core
X0.2
TxTip7
Red core
X0.3
TxRing7
X0.4
8
CHAN7 7
6
CHAN6 5
CHAN5
4
3
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-19
Channel No.
CHAN3
CHAN2
CHAN1
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Wire pair No.
2
1
Pin No.
Signal
Chapter 4 Cables
Remark
X0.19
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.20
TxTip4
White core
X0.21
TxRing4
X0.22
Channel No.
Wire pair No.
Pin No.
Signal
Remark
X0.44
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.45
TxTip4
White core
Orange core
X0.46
TxRing4
Orange core
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.47
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.23
RxTip4
White core
X0.48
RxTip4
White core
X0.24
RxRing4
Blue core
X0.49
RxRing4
Blue core
X0.25
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.50
PGND
Braided shielding layer
2
CHAN4 1
Channel No.
CHAN0
4.3.2 Clock Signal Cable between SoftX3000 and BITS Device External clock cables are 75-ohm coaxial cables in the same model as the internal 2-MHz clock cable , used to connect the active and standby CKIIs with the BITS device. Figure 4-19 shows its appearance.
4.3.3 External Network Cables of SoftX3000 The external network cables are used to connect SoftX3000 with external network devices, and the external network ports on the SoftX3000 are provided by the corresponding back interface boards. The MRS is also connected to SoftX3000 through external networking devices. The active and standby media resource interface boards (MRIAs) in SoftX3000 or the media processor cards (MPCs) and shelf control boards (SCCs) in MRS6000C are connected to the external routers or LAN Switches through the external network cables. The active and standby iGWB servers connect to the bill console or NMS device through the HUB. The external network cable connecting to the HUB acts as the first heartbeat signal path between the active and standby iGWB servers. The external network cables are category-5 unshielded or shielded crossover network cables with RJ45 connectors. See Figure 4-11 for the appearance of a crossover network cable, and Table 4-9 for its connection relations.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-20
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Table 4-9 Connections of a crossover network cable X1
X2
1
3
2
6
3
1
4
4
5
5
6
2
7
7
8
8
Remark A twisted pair
A twisted pair
A twisted pair
A twisted pair
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-21
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Appendix A Appendix
Appendix A Appendix Abbreviation
Full name
A ALUI
Alarm Unit
B BAM
Backend istration Module
BFII
Back insert FE Interface unit
BHCA
Busy Hour Call Attempt
BITS
Building Integrated Timing Supply
BSGI
Broadband Signaling Gateway
C CDBI
Central Database Board
CKII
Clock Interface Unit
U
Central Processing Unit
D DPC
Destination Point Code
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
E EPII
E1_Pool Interface unit
ESM
Enclosure Services Module
F FCCU
Fixed Calling Control Unit
FCSU
Fixed Calling control and Signaling process Unit
FE
Fast Ethernet
FTAM
File Transfer Access and Management Protocol
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
G GE
Gigabit Ethernet
H H.248
H.248/MECAMGO protocol
HSCI
Hot-Swap and Control unit
Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-1
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Appendix A Appendix
Abbreviation
Full name
I IEC 297
International Electrotechnical Commission 297
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IFMI
IP Forward Module
iGWB
Integrated Gateway Billing
ISUP
Integrated Services Digital Network Part/ISDN Part
IUA
ISDN Q.921- Adaptation Layer
K KVMS
Keyboard & Video & Mouse & Switcher
M M2UA
Message Transfer Part 2 (MTP2) – Adaptation Layer
M3UA
Message Transfer Part 3 (MTP3) – Adaptation Layer
MAC
Media Access Control
MG
Media Gateway Control Protocol
MPC
Media Processor Card
MRCA
Media Resource Control Adapter
MRIA
Media Resource Interface Adapter
MRS
Media Resource Server
MSGI
Multimedia Signaling Gateway unit
N NI
Network Indication
O OMC
Operation and Maintenance Center
OPC
Originating Point Code
OSTA
Open Standards Telecom Architecture platform
P PCI
Peripheral Component Interconnect
POTS
Plain Old Telephone Service
PPS
Packets Percent Second
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
R RAS
Remote Access Server
RPM
Rotation per minute Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-2
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Appendix A Appendix
Abbreviation
Full name
S SCC
Shelf Control Card
SCSI
Small Computer Systems Interface
SCTP
Signaling Control Transmission Protocol
SIP
Session Initiation Protocol
SIUI
System Interface Unit
SMUI
System Management Unit
T T
Transport Control Protocol
TDM
Time Division Multiplex
U UDP
Datagram Protocol
UL
Underwriter Laboratories
UPWR
Universal Power
V V5UA
V5.2- Adaptation Layer
W WDMC
power Distribution Monitor & Control unit
WOPB
Overvoltage Protection Board
WOTB
Overvoltage Protection Transfer Board
WSTB
Signals Transfer Board
Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-3
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Index
Index Numerics
F
120-ohm E1 cable, 4-17
fiber management tray (FMT), 1-39
75-ohm E1 cable, 4-15
H
A
hard disk array, 1-40
air deflector, 1-33
heat dissipation, 2-3
alarm box, 1-51 American Wire Gauge (AWG), 4-3
I
B
iGWB, 1-44, 1-47 internal signal cable, 4-8
board
data cable, 4-8
ALUI, 3-3
FE signal cable, 4-8
back board, 3-1
internal clock cable, 4-8
backplane, 3-1
serial port cable, 4-8
BFII, 3-6
straight through cable, 4-8
BSGI, 3-7
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), 1-6
CDBI, 3-11
K
CKII, 3-13 EPII, 3-15
KVM/LCD. See KVMS
FCCU, 3-17
KVMS, 1-34
front board, 3-1 HSCI, 3-25
L
IFMI, 3-27
LAN Switch, 1-36
MRCA, 3-34 MRIA, 3-36
N
MSGI, 3-37 SIUI, 3-29
N68-22 cabinet, 1-2
SMUI, 3-32
N800 floor holder, 1-5
UPWR, 3-40
floor holder-slide rail assemblies, 1-5
C
Height range, 1-5 holder fixing component, 1-5
cabling trough, 1-39
side rail, 1-5
E
O
external signal cable, 4-15
open standard telecom architecture (OSTA), 2-1
Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-1
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Index
P
KVMS, 1-35 LAN Switch, 1-38
power distribution frame (PDF), 1-26
N68-22 cabinet, 1-6 power distribution frame, 1-31
S
workstation, 1-50
SoftX3000 cabinet integrated configuration cabinet, 1-7
U
MRS cabinet, 1-13
universal alarm box. See alarm box
service processing cabinet, 1-11
W
T
WDMB, 1-27
technical specifications
workstation, 1-50
BAM, 1-49
emergency workstation \i, 1-50
hard disk array, 1-43
WSTB, 1-27
iGWB, 1-49
i.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-2
1-1
1.1 Introduction to the Chapter ..................................................................... 1.2 Appearance and Features of Cabinet .................................................... 1.2.1 Cabinet Appearance ...................................................................... 1.2.2 Cabinet Architecture ...................................................................... 1.2.3 N800 and Accessories ..................................................... 1.2.4 Technical Specifications of N68-22 Cabinet .................................. 1.3 Classification of Cabinets ....................................................................... 1.3.1 Overview of Cabinet Classification ................................................ 1.3.2 Integrated Configuration Cabinet ................................................... 1.3.3 Service Processing Cabinet ........................................................... 1.3.4 MRS Cabinet .................................................................................. 1.3.5 Cabinet of SoftX3000 and SG7000................................................ 1.3.6 Cabinet of VIG8920 - SoftX3000 and UMG8900 ........................... 1.4 Typical Configurations of Cabinet .......................................................... 1.4.1 Overview of Cabinet Typical Configurations .................................. 1.4.2 Embedded-MRS Mode .................................................................. 1.4.3 Separate-MRS Mode ..................................................................... 1.5 Power Distribution Frame ....................................................................... 1.5.1 Functions of Power Distribution Frame .......................................... 1.5.2 Appearance of Power Distribution Frame ...................................... 1.5.3 Front View of Power Distribution Frame ........................................ 1.5.4 Rear View of Power Distribution Frame ......................................... 1.5.5 Technical Specifications of Power Distribution Frame ................... 1.6 Air Deflector ............................................................................................ 1.6.1 Functions of Air Deflector............................................................... 1.6.2 Appearance of Air Deflector ........................................................... 1.7 KVMS ..................................................................................................... 1.7.1 Functions of KVMS ........................................................................ 1.7.2 Appearance of KVMS .................................................................... 1.7.3 Technical Specifications of KVMS ................................................. 1.8 LAN Switch ............................................................................................. 1.8.1 Functions of LAN Switch ................................................................ 1.8.2 Front View of LAN Switch .............................................................. 1.8.3 Rear View of LAN Switch ............................................................... 1.8.4 Technical Specifications of LAN Switch ......................................... 1.9 Cabling Trough ....................................................................................... 1.9.1 Functions of Cabling Trough .......................................................... 1.9.2 Appearance and Architecture of Cabling Trough ........................... 1.10 IBM EXP400 Hard Disk Array ..............................................................
1-1 1-1 1-1 1-2 1-4 1-6 1-7 1-7 1-7 1-11 1-13 1-16 1-19 1-22 1-22 1-22 1-23 1-26 1-26 1-27 1-28 1-30 1-31 1-33 1-33 1-34 1-34 1-34 1-34 1-35 1-36 1-36 1-37 1-38 1-38 1-39 1-39 1-39 1-40
1.10.1 Overview of Hard Disk Array ........................................................ 1.10.2 Appearance of Hard Disk Array ................................................... 1.10.3 Front View of Hard Disk Array ..................................................... 1.10.4 Rear View of Hard Disk Array ...................................................... 1.10.5 Technical Specifications of Hard Disk Array ................................ 1.11 BAM and iGWB Server (HP Server) ..................................................... 1.11.1 Functions of BAM and iGWB Server (HP Server)........................ 1.11.2 View of iGWB Server ................................................................... 1.11.3 Technical Specifications of BAM and iGWB Server..................... 1.12 BAM and iGWB Server (IBM Server) ................................................... 1.12.1 Functions of BAM and iGWB Server ............................................ 1.12.2 Front View of BAM and iGWB Server .......................................... 1.12.3 Rear View of BAM and iGWB Server ........................................... 1.12.4 Technical Specifications of BAM and iGWB Server..................... 1.13 Workstation .......................................................................................... 1.13.1 Functions of Workstation ............................................................. 1.13.2 Technical Specifications of Workstation ...................................... 1.14 Universal Alarm Box .............................................................................
1-40 1-40 1-41 1-42 1-43 1-44 1-44 1-44 1-46 1-47 1-47 1-47 1-48 1-49 1-50 1-50 1-50 1-51
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame ...................................................................................
2-1
2.1 Introduction to the Chapter ..................................................................... 2.2 Overview of OSTA Frame ...................................................................... 2.3 Features of OSTA Frame ....................................................................... 2.4 Board Allocation of OSTA Frame ........................................................... 2.5 Fan Box .................................................................................................. 2.5.1 Overview of Fan Box ...................................................................... 2.5.2 Functions of Fan Box ..................................................................... 2.5.3 Front View of Fan Box ................................................................... 2.5.4 Technical Specifications of Fan Box .............................................. 2.6 Classification of Frames ......................................................................... 2.6.1 Overview of Frame Classification .................................................. 2.6.2 Basic Frame 0 ................................................................................ 2.6.3 Basic Frame 1 ................................................................................ 2.6.4 Expansion Frame ........................................................................... 2.6.5 Media Resource Frame .................................................................
2-1 2-1 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-8 2-10
Chapter 3 Boards .............................................................................................
3-1
3.1 Classification of Boards .......................................................................... 3.2 ALUI ....................................................................................................... 3.2.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 3.2.2 Technical Specifications ................................................................
3-1 3-3 3-3 3-3
3.2.3 Indicators ....................................................................................... 3.2.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................ 3.3 BFII ......................................................................................................... 3.3.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 3.3.2 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 3.3.3 Indicators ....................................................................................... 3.3.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................ 3.4 BSGI ....................................................................................................... 3.4.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 3.4.2 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 3.4.3 Indicators ....................................................................................... 3.4.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................ 3.5 CDBI ....................................................................................................... 3.5.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 3.5.2 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 3.5.3 Indicators ....................................................................................... 3.5.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................ 3.6 CKII ........................................................................................................ 3.6.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 3.6.2 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 3.6.3 Indicators ....................................................................................... 3.6.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................ 3.7 EPII......................................................................................................... 3.7.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 3.7.2 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 3.7.3 Indicators ....................................................................................... 3.7.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................ 3.8 FCCU ..................................................................................................... 3.8.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 3.8.2 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 3.8.3 Indicators ....................................................................................... 3.8.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................ 3.9 FCSU...................................................................................................... 3.9.1 Functions ....................................................................................... 3.9.2 Technical Specifications ................................................................ 3.9.3 Indicators ....................................................................................... 3.9.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ............................................................ 3.10 HSCI ..................................................................................................... 3.10.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 3.10.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 3.10.3 Indicators .....................................................................................
3-4 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-7 3-7 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-13 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-17 3-17 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-21 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-25 3-26
3.10.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers .......................................................... 3.11 IFMI ...................................................................................................... 3.11.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 3.11.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 3.11.3 Indicators ..................................................................................... 3.11.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers .......................................................... 3.12 SIUI ...................................................................................................... 3.12.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 3.12.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 3.12.3 Indicators ..................................................................................... 3.12.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers .......................................................... 3.13 SMUI .................................................................................................... 3.13.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 3.13.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 3.13.3 Indicators ..................................................................................... 3.13.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers .......................................................... 3.14 MRCA ................................................................................................... 3.14.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 3.14.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 3.14.3 Indicators ..................................................................................... 3.14.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers .......................................................... 3.15 MRIA .................................................................................................... 3.15.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 3.15.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 3.15.3 Indicators ..................................................................................... 3.15.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers .......................................................... 3.16 MSGI .................................................................................................... 3.16.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 3.16.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 3.16.3 Indicators ..................................................................................... 3.16.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers .......................................................... 3.17 UPWR .................................................................................................. 3.17.1 Functions ..................................................................................... 3.17.2 Technical Specifications .............................................................. 3.17.3 Indicators ..................................................................................... 3.17.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ..........................................................
3-27 3-27 3-27 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-29 3-29 3-30 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-33 3-34 3-34 3-34 3-34 3-35 3-36 3-36 3-36 3-36 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-40 3-40 3-40 3-41 3-42
Chapter 4 Cables .............................................................................................
4-1
4.1 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable ...................................... 4.1.1 Input Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for Cabinet ....................................................................................................
4-1 4-1
4.1.2 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cables for Service Frame...................................................................................................... 4.1.3 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for KVMS Switcher .................................................................................................. 4.1.4 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for LAN Switch ..... 4.1.5 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for HP Server ....... 4.1.6 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for IBM Server ...... 4.1.7 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for Hard Disk Array ....................................................................................................... 4.1.8 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for MRS ................ 4.1.9 Other Protection Grounding Cables ............................................... 4.2 Internal Signal Cable .............................................................................. 4.2.1 Straight Through Cable .................................................................. 4.2.2 Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers (HP Server) ................. 4.2.3 Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers (IBM Server) ................ 4.2.4 Data Cable Between iGWB Server and Hard Disk Array............... 4.2.5 Server/Switcher Cable ................................................................... 4.2.6 Serial Port Cable for Monitoring Power Distribution Frame ........... 4.2.7 Internal Clock Cable ....................................................................... 4.3 External Signal Cable ............................................................................. 4.3.1 Trunk Cable between SoftX3000 and Digital Distribution Frame... 4.3.2 Clock Signal Cable between SoftX3000 and BITS Device ............ 4.3.3 External Network Cables of SoftX3000..........................................
4-6 4-7 4-7 4-8 4-8 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-15 4-20 4-20
Appendix A Appendix .....................................................................................
A-1
Index .................................................................................................................
4-3 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-5
HUAWEI
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Hardware Description Manual V300R003
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Hardware Description Manual Manual Version
T2-012532-20050331-C-3.30
Product Version
V300R003
BOM
31250332
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical and service. Please feel free to our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Address: istration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd., Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China Postal Code: 518129 Website: http://www.huawei.com Email: [email protected]
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Copyright © 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All Rights Reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET,
, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,
TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800, TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN, HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye, Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, and TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective holders.
Notice The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
About This Manual Release Notes This manual applies to U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System V300R003.
Related Manuals The related manuals are listed in the following table. Manual
Content
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-System Description
It provides an overall introduction to the SoftX3000, including product features, applications, and technical specifications.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-System Principle
It details on the hardware architecture, component interworking mechanism, and subsystems of alarm, billing, and clock in the SoftX3000.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Hardware Description Manual
It details the features and technical specifications of the hardware components of the SoftX3000, including cabinets, frames, boards, cables, and cabinet internal components.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Service and Features Manual
It covers various services and functions ed by the SoftX3000, including voice services, supplementary services, IP Centrex services, multi-media services, value added services, dual homing functions, charging functions, IPTN functions, remote network access functions, and so on.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Hardware Installation Manual
It details the installation procedure of the SoftX3000 hardware components, and matters needing attention during the installation process.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Software Installation Manual
It covers the detailed procedure of installing the SoftX3000 software, including BAM server, emergency workstation, and client, focusing on the key points that might cause installation failure.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Routine Maintenance Guide
It guides the maintenance engineers to perform daily maintenance, monthly maintenance, and yearly maintenance tasks on the SoftX3000.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Manual
Content
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Emergency Maintenance Manual
It guides the maintenance engineers to perform recovery operations in the case of emergencies, such as congestion of global service, AMG, and TMG, and failure of host and BAM.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Part Replacement Guide
It guides the maintenance engineers on how to replace hardware components of the SoftX3000, such as boards, fan frame, LAN Switch, and hard disk.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Operation Manual-Configuration Guide
It guides the engineers how to configure various data in the SoftX3000, including configuration steps, preparations, database table referencing relationships, and command parameters.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Operation Manual-Configuration Examples
It guides the engineers how to configure various data in the SoftX3000, including networking example, configuration script, key parameters and debugging guidance.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Operation Manual-Traffic Measurement
It guides the engineers how to perform traffic measurement operations and how to analyze traffic measurement results.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Operation Manual-GUI Guide
It guides the engineers how to use the GUI on various clients of the SoftX3000, including operations on menus and navigation tree. In addition, it introduces the operations on TableBrowse.
U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System BAM Manual
It guides the engineers how to install and use the software related to the BAM, including remote maintenance software, anti-virus software, system customized software, and so on.
U-SYS iGateway Bill Manual
It elaborates on the functioning principle of the iGateway Bill. Also, it teaches you on how to install, maintain, and operate the product.
Organization The manual details the installation procedures of SoftX3000 software and key points to be cautious about. The manual contains four chapters and an appendix. z
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components details the classification and features of SoftX3000 cabinets, and the functions and technical specifications of internal components used in the cabinets.
z
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame is a reference of OSTA frame features, classifications, and technical specifications. Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Chapter 3 Boards features the functions and technical specifications of all
z
boards used in SoftX3000. The chapter also details the indicators, jumpers, and DIP switches of each type of board. Chapter 4 Cables describes the different types of cables used in SoftX3000
z
cabinets. Appendix A Acronyms and Abbreviations lists the acronyms and
z
abbreviations used in the manual..
Intended Audience The manual is intended for the following readers: z
NGN engineering specialist
z
NGN operation & maintenance personnel
z
NGN network planning experts
Conventions The manual uses the following conventions:
I. General conventions Convention
Description
Arial
Normal paragraphs are in Arial.
Boldface
Headings are in Boldface.
Courier New
Terminal Display is in Courier New.
II. Command conventions Convention
Description
Boldface
The keywords of a command line are in Boldface.
italic
Command arguments are in italic.
[]
Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.
{ x | y | ... }
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ]
Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars. One or none is selected.
{ x | y | ... } *
Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Convention
Description Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars. Many or none can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ] *
III. GUI conventions Convention
Description
<>
Button names are inside angle brackets. For example, click the
[]
Window names, menu items, data table and field names are inside square brackets. For example, pop up the [New ] window.
/
Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example, [File/Create/Folder].
IV. Keyboard operation Format
Description
Press the key with the key name inside angle brackets. For example, <Enter>,
Press the keys concurrently. For example,
Press the keys in turn. For example,
V. Mouse operation Action
Description
Click
Press the left button or right button quickly (left button by default).
Double Click
Press the left button twice continuously and quickly.
Drag
Press and hold the left button and drag it to a certain position.
VI. Symbols Eye-catching symbols are also used in the manual to highlight the points worthy of special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Caution, Warning, Danger: Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.
Note, Comment, Tip, Knowhow, Thought: Means a complementary
description.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Table of Contents
Table of Contents Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components ............................................................................. 1-1 1.1 Introduction to the Chapter ................................................................................................ 1-1 1.2 Appearance and Features of Cabinet................................................................................ 1-1 1.2.1 Cabinet Appearance ............................................................................................... 1-1 1.2.2 Cabinet Architecture................................................................................................ 1-2 1.2.3 N800 and Accessories............................................................................... 1-4 1.2.4 Technical Specifications of N68-22 Cabinet ........................................................... 1-6 1.3 Classification of Cabinets .................................................................................................. 1-7 1.3.1 Overview of Cabinet Classification.......................................................................... 1-7 1.3.2 Integrated Configuration Cabinet ............................................................................ 1-7 1.3.3 Service Processing Cabinet .................................................................................. 1-11 1.3.4 MRS Cabinet ......................................................................................................... 1-13 1.3.5 Cabinet of SoftX3000 and SG7000....................................................................... 1-16 1.3.6 Cabinet of VIG8920—SoftX3000 and UMG8900.................................................. 1-19 1.4 Typical Configurations of Cabinet.................................................................................... 1-22 1.4.1 Overview of Cabinet Typical Configurations ......................................................... 1-22 1.4.2 Embedded-MRS Mode.......................................................................................... 1-22 1.4.3 Separate-MRS Mode ............................................................................................ 1-23 1.5 Power Distribution Frame ................................................................................................ 1-26 1.5.1 Functions of Power Distribution Frame................................................................. 1-26 1.5.2 Appearance of Power Distribution Frame ............................................................. 1-27 1.5.3 Front View of Power Distribution Frame ............................................................... 1-28 1.5.4 Rear View of Power Distribution Frame................................................................ 1-30 1.5.5 Technical Specifications of Power Distribution Frame.......................................... 1-31 1.6 Air Deflector ..................................................................................................................... 1-33 1.6.1 Functions of Air Deflector...................................................................................... 1-33 1.6.2 Appearance of Air Deflector .................................................................................. 1-34 1.7 KVMS............................................................................................................................... 1-34 1.7.1 Functions of KVMS ............................................................................................... 1-34 1.7.2 Appearance of KVMS............................................................................................ 1-34 1.7.3 Technical Specifications of KVMS ........................................................................ 1-35 1.8 LAN Switch ...................................................................................................................... 1-36 1.8.1 Functions of LAN Switch ....................................................................................... 1-36 1.8.2 Front View of LAN Switch ..................................................................................... 1-37 1.8.3 Rear View of LAN Switch ...................................................................................... 1-38 1.8.4 Technical Specifications of LAN Switch................................................................ 1-38 1.9 Cabling Trough ................................................................................................................ 1-39
Huawei Technologies Proprietary i
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Table of Contents
1.9.1 Functions of Cabling Trough ................................................................................. 1-39 1.9.2 Appearance and Architecture of Cabling Trough.................................................. 1-39 1.10 IBM EXP400 Hard Disk Array........................................................................................ 1-40 1.10.1 Overview of Hard Disk Array............................................................................... 1-40 1.10.2 Appearance of Hard Disk Array .......................................................................... 1-40 1.10.3 Front View of Hard Disk Array............................................................................. 1-41 1.10.4 Rear View of Hard Disk Array ............................................................................. 1-42 1.10.5 Technical Specifications of Hard Disk Array ....................................................... 1-43 1.11 BAM and iGWB Server (HP Server) .............................................................................. 1-44 1.11.1 Functions of BAM and iGWB Server (HP Server)............................................... 1-44 1.11.2 View of iGWB Server .......................................................................................... 1-44 1.11.3 Technical Specifications of BAM and iGWB Server............................................ 1-46 1.12 BAM and iGWB Server (IBM Server)............................................................................. 1-47 1.12.1 Functions of BAM and iGWB Server................................................................... 1-47 1.12.2 Front View of BAM and iGWB Server ................................................................. 1-47 1.12.3 Rear View of BAM and iGWB Server.................................................................. 1-48 1.12.4 Technical Specifications of BAM and iGWB Server............................................ 1-49 1.13 Workstation .................................................................................................................... 1-50 1.13.1 Functions of Workstation..................................................................................... 1-50 1.13.2 Technical Specifications of Workstation ............................................................. 1-50 1.14 Universal Alarm Box ...................................................................................................... 1-51 Chapter 2 OSTA Frame ................................................................................................................. 2-1 2.1 Introduction to the Chapter ................................................................................................ 2-1 2.2 Overview of OSTA Frame.................................................................................................. 2-1 2.3 Features of OSTA Frame .................................................................................................. 2-1 2.4 Board Allocation of OSTA Frame ...................................................................................... 2-2 2.5 Fan Box.............................................................................................................................. 2-3 2.5.1 Overview of Fan Box............................................................................................... 2-3 2.5.2 Functions of Fan Box .............................................................................................. 2-3 2.5.3 Front View of Fan Box............................................................................................. 2-3 2.5.4 Technical Specifications of Fan Box ....................................................................... 2-4 2.6 Classification of Frames .................................................................................................... 2-4 2.6.1 Overview of Frame Classification............................................................................ 2-4 2.6.2 Basic Frame 0 ......................................................................................................... 2-5 2.6.3 Basic Frame 1 ......................................................................................................... 2-6 2.6.4 Expansion Frame .................................................................................................... 2-8 2.6.5 Media Resource Frame......................................................................................... 2-10 Chapter 3 Boards........................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 Classification of Boards ..................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 ALUI ................................................................................................................................... 3-3 3.2.1 Functions................................................................................................................. 3-3 3.2.2 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 3-3 Huawei Technologies Proprietary ii
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Table of Contents
3.2.3 Indicators................................................................................................................. 3-4 3.2.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ..................................................................................... 3-6 3.3 BFII .................................................................................................................................... 3-6 3.3.1 Functions................................................................................................................. 3-6 3.3.2 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 3-6 3.3.3 Indicators................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.3.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ..................................................................................... 3-7 3.4 BSGI .................................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.4.1 Functions................................................................................................................. 3-7 3.4.2 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................... 3-8 3.4.3 Indicators................................................................................................................. 3-9 3.4.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-11 3.5 CDBI ................................................................................................................................ 3-11 3.5.1 Functions............................................................................................................... 3-11 3.5.2 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 3-11 3.5.3 Indicators............................................................................................................... 3-11 3.5.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-12 3.6 CKII .................................................................................................................................. 3-13 3.6.1 Functions............................................................................................................... 3-13 3.6.2 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 3-13 3.6.3 Indicators............................................................................................................... 3-13 3.6.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-15 3.7 EPII .................................................................................................................................. 3-15 3.7.1 Functions............................................................................................................... 3-15 3.7.2 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 3-15 3.7.3 Indicators............................................................................................................... 3-16 3.7.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-17 3.8 FCCU ............................................................................................................................... 3-17 3.8.1 Functions............................................................................................................... 3-17 3.8.2 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 3-19 3.8.3 Indicators............................................................................................................... 3-20 3.8.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-21 3.9 FCSU ............................................................................................................................... 3-21 3.9.1 Functions............................................................................................................... 3-21 3.9.2 Technical Specifications........................................................................................ 3-22 3.9.3 Indicators............................................................................................................... 3-23 3.9.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................... 3-25 3.10 HSCI .............................................................................................................................. 3-25 3.10.1 Functions............................................................................................................. 3-25 3.10.2 Technical Specifications...................................................................................... 3-25 3.10.3 Indicators............................................................................................................. 3-26 3.10.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-27
Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Table of Contents
3.11 IFMI................................................................................................................................ 3-27 3.11.1 Functions............................................................................................................. 3-27 3.11.2 Technical Specifications...................................................................................... 3-27 3.11.3 Indicators............................................................................................................. 3-28 3.11.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-29 3.12 SIUI ................................................................................................................................ 3-29 3.12.1 Functions............................................................................................................. 3-29 3.12.2 Technical Specifications...................................................................................... 3-30 3.12.3 Indicators............................................................................................................. 3-30 3.12.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-31 3.13 SMUI .............................................................................................................................. 3-32 3.13.1 Functions............................................................................................................. 3-32 3.13.2 Technical Specifications...................................................................................... 3-32 3.13.3 Indicators............................................................................................................. 3-33 3.13.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-34 3.14 MRCA ............................................................................................................................ 3-34 3.14.1 Functions............................................................................................................. 3-34 3.14.2 Technical Specifications...................................................................................... 3-34 3.14.3 Indicators............................................................................................................. 3-35 3.14.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-36 3.15 MRIA .............................................................................................................................. 3-36 3.15.1 Functions............................................................................................................. 3-36 3.15.2 Technical Specifications...................................................................................... 3-36 3.15.3 Indicators............................................................................................................. 3-37 3.15.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-37 3.16 MSGI.............................................................................................................................. 3-37 3.16.1 Functions............................................................................................................. 3-37 3.16.2 Technical Specifications...................................................................................... 3-38 3.16.3 Indicators............................................................................................................. 3-39 3.16.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-40 3.17 UPWR ............................................................................................................................ 3-40 3.17.1 Functions............................................................................................................. 3-40 3.17.2 Technical Specifications...................................................................................... 3-40 3.17.3 Indicators............................................................................................................. 3-41 3.17.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers ................................................................................. 3-42 Chapter 4 Cables ........................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable.................................................................. 4-1 4.1.1 Input Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for Cabinet ........................... 4-1 4.1.2 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cables for Service Frame ....................... 4-3 4.1.3 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for KVMS Switcher........................ 4-3 4.1.4 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for LAN Switch .............................. 4-4 4.1.5 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for HP Server ................................ 4-4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary iv
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Table of Contents
4.1.6 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for IBM Server............................... 4-5 4.1.7 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for Hard Disk Array ....................... 4-6 4.1.8 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for MRS......................................... 4-7 4.1.9 Other Protection Grounding Cables ........................................................................ 4-7 4.2 Internal Signal Cable ......................................................................................................... 4-8 4.2.1 Straight Through Cable ........................................................................................... 4-8 4.2.2 Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers (HP Server) ........................................ 4-10 4.2.3 Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers (IBM Server)....................................... 4-11 4.2.4 Data Cable Between iGWB Server and Hard Disk Array ..................................... 4-12 4.2.5 Server/Switcher Cable .......................................................................................... 4-12 4.2.6 Serial Port Cable for Monitoring Power Distribution Frame .................................. 4-13 4.2.7 Internal Clock Cable.............................................................................................. 4-14 4.3 External Signal Cable ...................................................................................................... 4-15 4.3.1 Trunk Cable between SoftX3000 and Digital Distribution Frame ......................... 4-15 4.3.2 Clock Signal Cable between SoftX3000 and BITS Device ................................... 4-20 4.3.3 External Network Cables of SoftX3000................................................................. 4-20 Appendix A Appendix ...................................................................................................................A-1 Index ................................................................................................................................................ i-1
Huawei Technologies Proprietary v
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components 1.1 Introduction to the Chapter This chapter first introduces the appearance, features, and components of SoftX3000 cabinet. Then, the chapter details the following components of the cabinet: z
Back istration module (BAM)
z
iGateway Bill (iGWB, when using IBM server)
z
Hard disk array
z
Cabling trough and cabling rack
z
Workstation
z
LAN Switches
z
Keyboard, Video, Mouse & Switcher (KVMS)
z
Air deflector
z
Power distribution frame (PDF)
For the media resource server (MRS) MRS6000-C used in SoftX30000, refer to U-SYS MRS6000-C Manual for details.
1.2 Appearance and Features of Cabinet 1.2.1 Cabinet Appearance Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of an N68-22 cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-1
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Figure 1-1 Appearance of N68-22 cabinet
1.2.2 Cabinet Architecture Figure 1-2 shows the architecture of N68-22 cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-2
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components (1)
(2) (6)
(4)
(5)
(3)
(7)
(1) Rack (4) Door lintel (7) N800
(2) Left side (5) Front door
(3) Left side (6) Rear door
Figure 1-2 Cabinet architecture The front door and rear door of the N68-22 cabinet each consists of two flip-open door s. The flip-open design saves installation space and facilitates operation on the cabinet. The side s are installed in hang-in mode. The mount angles on the side s are used to fasten internal cabinet components. There are grounding bars on the side posts at the back of the cabinet, which is used for grounding internal components and interconnecting grounding cables between cabinets. The wire-bushings on the side posts, the cable strips and cabling rack on the back of the cabinet are used for the layout and bundling of internal cables of the cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-3
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
The N68-22 cabinet can be installed on cement floor or ESD-preventive floor. When installing the N68-22 cabinet on the ESD-preventive floor, you have to use N800 series s.
1.2.3 N800 and Accessories I. Introduction to If N68-22 cabinets are installed in the equipment room with ESD-preventive floor, N800 series s are used. s, made of welded steel plates, are used to block the cabinets up, thus facilitating floor paving and cabling. Before the whole set of equipment is grounded, insulation plates must be installed under the s, and insulating coverings must be added to the expansion bolts to satisfy the insulation requirements. N800 series s have four kinds of components, of which three kinds are height adjustable and one kind is with fixed height. Figure 1-3 shows the outer appearance of an N800 . Table 1-1 shows the height adjustment range of each kind of component. (6)
(1)
(6)
(2) (7)
(4) (8)
(5)
(3)
(1) Upper (2) Height mark of ESD-preventive floor (3) Lower beam of (4) Standby installation hole (5) Installation hole (6) Connection hole for slide rail (7) Height-locking bolt (middle) (8) Height-locking bolt (side)
Figure 1-3 Appearance of N800
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-4
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Table 1-1 Height range of N800 components Component
Applicable ESD-preventive floor height (mm)
I
210 – 255
II
256 – 345
III
346 – 525
IV
Customized for the floor height (minimum height: 100 mm)
Note: The height of floor refers to the distance between the upper surface of ESD-preventive floor and the cement floor.
The height of N800 series I, II and III components can be adjusted within their adjustable ranges, which is realized by means of the relative move between upper beam and lower beam. N800 IV component is the of fixed height, which is applicable to ultra-high and ultra-low floors. The lowest applicable floor height of this component is 100 mm.
II. Introduction to floor holder-slide rail assemblies Floor holder-slide rail assemblies include three parts: z
Floor holder
z
Holder fixing component
z
Slide rail.
Floor holders are used to the floor around a cabinet, and can be divided into front and back floor holders, and side floor holders. Holder fixing components are installed under slide rails, and they are used to connect slide rails and front and back floor holders. Slide rails are used to connect the cabinet and s, and to move the equipment and adjust the equipment positions. They can two s and a cabinet together to keep the cabinet in a horizontal line and the connection stable. Due to their elasticity, the slide rails can absorb the vibrations. Figure 1-4 shows the appearance of a slide rail.
(2)
(1)
(1) Connection hole for
(2) Connection hole for cabinet
Figure 1-4 Appearance and dimensions of slide rail
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-5
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
III. Amount of s, Floor Holders, and Slide Rails To connect cabinets, 2N mode is used to determine the number of s to be used. That is, each N68-22 cabinet uses two s and N cabinets in a row need 2N s. Each cabinet has one set of floor holder-slide rail assemblies, and the sets are delivered together with the s. Each set of floor holder-slide rail assemblies include two slide rails, two side holders, one front floor holder and one back floor holder. Each cabinet needs two holder fixing components, one front floor holder, and one back floor holder, and each cabinet row needs two side floor holders, even if there is only one cabinet in a row.
1.2.4 Technical Specifications of N68-22 Cabinet Table 1-2 shows the technical specifications of the N68-22 cabinet. Table 1-2 Technical specifications of the N68-22 cabinet Item
Specifications
Design
It conforms to International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 297. The modular design facilitates expansion and maintenance.
Dimensio ns
2200 mm (height) x 600 mm (width) x 800 mm (depth)
Capacity
Height of available space of a cabinet: 46 U (1 U = 44.45 mm). One cabinet can accommodate a maximum of four standard 19-inch frames.
Weight
130 kg as an empty cabinet, or 400 kg with full configuration
Cabling mode
There are cable-through holes both at the top and at the bottom of the cabinet, ing upward cabling and downward cabling.
Heat dissipatio n
The front and back doors and the bottom plate have minute air vents and are configured with air filters inside. The cabinet adopts front-in, back-out and bottom-to-top ventilation mode so that it has excellent heat dissipation and dust-proof functions. Fully considering EMC in cabinet design; all interfaces enjoy electromagnetic shielding.
Protection
The front and back doors and the bottom plate have minute air vents and are configured with air filters inside. There are anti-rodent bags at the cable-through holes to prevent dust and animals from entering the cabinet.
Material
N68-22 cabinet is assembled with electrolytic zinc-coated cold-rolled steel sheet and screws, featuring light weight, simple structure and high versatility. The fire-proof materials conform to the Underwriter Laboratory (UL) standards.
Color
The cabinet surface is Huawei purple-gray and NC silver-gray, and the rack is Huawei purple-gray.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-6
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.3 Classification of Cabinets 1.3.1 Overview of Cabinet Classification SoftX3000 cabinets fall into the following types according to cabinet components and actual configurations: z
Integrated configuration cabinet
z
Service processing cabinet
z
MRS cabinet
The MRS cabinet is required when you configure a separate MRS in SoftX3000.
1.3.2 Integrated Configuration Cabinet I. Overview of Integrated Configuration Cabinet The integrated configuration cabinet is mandatory. It includes iGWB, BAM, hard disk array, LAN Switch, KVMS, and service frames. There are three types of services frames: basic frame, expansion frame, and media resource frame. The integrated configuration cabinet provides the following features: z
Providing complete service processing ability.
z
Providing IP, clock, and TDM external interfaces
z
Managing communication between the host and the BAM.
z
Storing bills.
z
Providing MRS feature when configuring a media resource frame.
The configuration of integrated configuration cabinet in different countries and regions are different.
II. Integrated Configuration Cabinet in China When SoftX3000 is used in China, the BAM and the iGWB use HP servers. The BAM is not configured with hard disk array, and the iGWB is configured with built-in hard disk array. Figure 1-5 shows the configuration of an integrated configuration cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-7
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Power distribution frame (2U)
Expansion frame/Media resource frame/MRS6100 (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Basic frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler (1U) KVMS(1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) Blank filler (3U) BAM(2U) Standby iGWB (2U) Active iGWB (2U) LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U) Figure 1-5 Full configuration of integrated configuration cabinet (China)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-8
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
III. Integrated Configuration Cabinet in North America When SoftX3000 is used in North America, the BAM and the iGWB use IBM servers. The BAM is not configured with disk array, and the iGWB is configured with an external disk array. KVM and KVMS are two independent devices. Figure 1-6 shows the configuration of an integrated configuration cabinet. Power distribution frame (2U)
Expansion frame/Media resource frame/MRS6100 (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Basic frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U) KVM(1U) KVMS(1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) Hard disk array (3U) BAM(2U) Standby iGWB (2U) Active iGWB (2U) LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-6 Full configuration of integrated configuration cabinet (North America)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-9
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
IV. Integrated Configuration Cabinet in Other Countries and Regions When SoftX3000 is used in other countries and regions, the BAM and the iGWB use IBM servers. The BAM is not configured with disk array, and the iGWB is configured with an external disk array. KVM and KVMS are combined into one device. Figure 1-7 shows the configuration of an integrated configuration cabinet. Power distribution frame (2U)
Expansion frame/Media resource frame/MRS6100 (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Basic frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler (1U) KVMS(1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) Hard disk array (3U) BAM(2U) Standby iGWB (2U) Active iGWB (2U) LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-7 Full configuration of integrated configuration cabinet (other countries and regions)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-10
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
V. Configuration Guidance In an integrated configuration cabinet, iGWB, hard disk array (necessary only when the iGWB uses the IBM server), BAM, LAN Switch 0, LAN Switch 1, KVMS (or KVM, KVM switcher), air deflector, basic frame, and power distribution frame must be configured. Other components are optional.The LAN Switch 2 and LAN Switch 3 are optional components, and provide IP interfaces for SoftX3000 in coordination with the IFMI in the basic frame. If you choose a separate MRS, you must configure an expansion frame at the near top of the integrated configuration cabinet. Otherwise, configure a media resource frame or MRS6100 there.
VI. Configuration Notes If neither an expansion frame nor a media resource frame is configured at the near top of the integrated configuration cabinet, cover it with a standard blank filler . The media resource frame accommodates MRCA and MRIA only.
1.3.3 Service Processing Cabinet I. Overview of Service Processing Cabinet Except for host-BAM communication and bill storage features, the service processing cabinet provides the same features as the integrated configuration cabinet. The system capacity determines the number of service processing cabinets (four at maximum). Figure 1-8 shows the frame position details. All frames are configured in a bottom-to-top sequence.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-11
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Service processing cabinet 1
Service processing cabinet 2
Service processing cabinet 3
Service processing cabinet 4
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Media resource frame/ expansion frame (9U)
Media resource frame/ expansion frame (9U)
Media resource frame/ expansion frame (9U)
Media resource frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Basic frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-8 Full configuration of service processing cabinet
Note: When there are more than 100,000 equivalent subscribers, it is recommended to use a separate MRS. In this case, configure three service processing cabinets, and replace the media resource frames with expansion frames.
II. Configuration Guidance When there is no separate MRS configured in the SoftX3000, you need to configure a media resource frame in a service processing cabinet (with MRCAs and MRIAs). When a separate MRS is configured in the SoftX3000, there is no need to configure a media resource frame in a service processing cabinet. Three service processing cabinets meet the demand for full configuration. When there is more than one service processing cabinet, you have to configure a basic frame 1 on the top of the second service processing cabinet.
III. Configuration Notes All vacant frame positions must be covered with blank filler s.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-12
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.3.4 MRS Cabinet I. Overview of MRS Cabinet The MRS cabinet is required when there are more than 100,000 equivalent subscribers. It is used to provide MRS feature instead of media resource frames.
II. MRS Cabinet Adopting MRS600-C When MRS6000-C is used as MRS, an MRS cabinet is configured with a PDF and an MRS6000-C frame, both of which are in fixed positions in the cabinet. All the other empty positions in the cabinet are covered with blank filler s. Figure 1-9 shows the configuration of the MRS cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-13
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Power distribution frame (2U) Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (2U)
MRS6000-C (13U)
Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-9 Configuration of MRS cabinet adopting MRS6000-C
III. MRS Cabinet Adopting MRS6100 When MRS6100 is used as MRS, an MRS cabinet is configured with a PDF and an MRS6100 frame, both of which are in fixed positions in the cabinet. All the other empty
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-14
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
positions in the cabinet are covered with blank filler s. Figure 1-9 shows the configuration of the MRS cabinet. Power distribution frame (2U)
MRS6100 (9U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (2U) KVM (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-10 Configuration of MRS cabinet adopting MRS6100
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-15
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.3.5 Cabinet of SoftX3000 and SG7000 The configuration of cabinet of SoftX3000 and SG7000 in different countries and regions are different.
I. In China When the cabinet of SoftX3000 and SG7000 is used in China, the BAM and the iGWB both use HP server. The BAM uses hard disk array, and the iGWB uses built-in hard disk array. Figure 1-11 shows the configuration of the cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-16
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Power distribution frame (2U)
SoftX3000 basic frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
SG7000 frame (14U)
KVMS (1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) Blank filler (3U) SoftX3000 BAM (2U) Standby iGWB(2U) Active iGWB(2U) LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) SG7000 BAM (2U)
Figure 1-11 Configuration of cabinet of SoftX3000 and SG7000 (in China)
II. Outside China When the cabinet is used in other countries and regions, the BAM and the iGWB use IBM servers. BAM is not configured with disk array, and iGWB is configured with an external disk array. Figure 1-12 shows the configuration of the cabinet
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-17
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Power distribution frame (2U)
SoftX3000 basic frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
SG7000 frame (14U)
KVMS (1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) Hard disk array (3U) SoftX3000 BAM (2U) Standby iGWB(2U) Active iGWB(2U) LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) SG7000 BAM (2U) Figure 1-12 Configuration of cabinet of SoftX3000 and SG7000 (outside China)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-18
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.3.6 Cabinet of VIG8920—SoftX3000 and UMG8900 The configuration of VIG8920 cabinet in different countries and regions are different.
I. In China When the VIG8920 cabinet is used in China, the BAM and the iGWB both use HP server. The BAM uses hard disk array, and the iGWB uses built-in hard disk array. Figure 1-13 shows the configuration of the cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-19
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Power distribution frame (2U)
SoftX3000 basic frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
UMG8900 frame (12U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler (1U) KVMS(1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) Blank filler (3U) BAM (2U) Standby iGWB (2U) Active iGWB(2U)
Figure 1-13 Configuration of VIG8920 cabinet (in China)
II. Outside China When the VIG8920 cabinet is used in other countries and regions, the BAM and the iGWB use IBM servers. BAM is not configured with disk array, and iGWB is configured with an external disk array. Figure 1-14 shows the configuration of the cabinet.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-20
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Power distribution frame (2U)
SoftX3000 basic frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
UMG8900 frame (12U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler (1U) KVMS(1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) Hard disk array (3U) BAM (2U) Standby iGWB (2U) Active iGWB(2U) Figure 1-14 Configuration of VIG8920 cabinet (outside China)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-21
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.4 Typical Configurations of Cabinet 1.4.1 Overview of Cabinet Typical Configurations There are two cabinet typical configurations: z
Embedded MRS
z
Independent MRS
1.4.2 Embedded-MRS Mode This mode is used when there are less than 100,000 equivalent subscribers. In this mode, the media resource frame is configured in the integrated configuration cabinet, as shown in Figure 1-15.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-22
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Integrated configuration cabinet Power distribution frame (2U)
Service processing cabinet Power distribution frame (2U) Blank filler (3U)
Media resource frame (01) (9U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U) Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler (3U)
Basic frame (00) (9U)
Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (3U) Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler (1U)
Blank filler (3U)
KVMS (1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U) Cabling trough (1U)
Blank filler (3U)
Hard disk array (3U)
Blank filler (3U)
BAM (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Standby iGWB (2U) Active iGWB (2U)
Expansion frame (02) (9U)
LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-15 Cabinet configuration of embedded-MRS mode
1.4.3 Separate-MRS Mode I. Overview of Separate-MRS Mode This mode uses a separate MRS. It is used when there are more than 100,000 equivalent subscribers. The MRS cabinet and integrated configuration cabinet are mandatory. Configure the service processing cabinet according to system capacity. At maximum, four can be configured.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-23
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
II. Using MRS6000-C When using MRS6000-C, the MRS cabinet must be configured. Figure 1-16 shows the full configuration of separate-MRS mode using MRS6000-C. MRS cabinet
Integrated configuration cabinet
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Service processing cabinet 1
Service processing cabinet 2
Service processing cabinet 3
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler (3U)
Media resource frame (9U)
Blank filler (3U) Air deflector (2U) Blank filler (2U)
Basic frame (9U)
MRS6000-C frame (13U)
Air deflector (2U)
Blank filler (3U)
Blank filler 1U) KVMS (1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Cabling trough (1U) Blank filler (2U)
Hard disk array (3U) BAM (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Standby iGWB (2U) Blank filler (3U) Active iGWB (2U) Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (2U)
LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-16 Cabinet configuration of embedded-MRS mode (Using MRS6000-C)
III. Using MRS6100 When using MRS6100, if it is configured in the MRS cabinet, the configuration is as shown in Figure 1-17.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-24
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
MRS cabinet
Integrated configuration cabinet
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
MRS6100 frame (9U)
Media resource frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Service processing cabinet 1
Service processing cabinet 2
Service processing cabinet 3
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (3U)
Basic frame (9U)
Blank filler (3U) Air deflector (2U) KVM (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (3U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler 1U) KVMS (1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Cabling trough (1U) Hard disk array (3U) BAM (2U) Standby iGWB (2U)
Blank filler (3U) Active iGWB (2U) Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (3U) Blank filler (2U)
LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-17 Using MRS6100 in MRS cabinet If the MRS6100 is configured in the integrated configuration cabinet, the configuration is as shown in Figure 1-18.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-25
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Integrated configuration cabinet Power distribution frame (2U)
MRS6100 frame (9U)
Service processing cabinet 1
Service processing cabinet 2
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Air deflector (2U) Blank filler 1U) KVMS (1U) LAN Switch 3 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 2 (1U)
Service processing cabinet 3
Service processing cabinet 4
Power distribution frame (2U)
Power distribution frame (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Basic frame (9U)
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Air deflector (2U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Expansion frame (9U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Blank filler (2U)
Cabling trough (1U) Hard disk array (3U) BAM (2U) Standby iGWB (2U) Active iGWB (2U) LAN Switch 1 (1U) Cabling trough (1U) LAN Switch 0 (1U) Blank filler (2U) Blank filler (2U)
Figure 1-18 Using MRS6100 in integrated configuration cabinet
1.5 Power Distribution Frame 1.5.1 Functions of Power Distribution Frame The power distribution frame (PDF) is installed at the top of an N68-22 cabinet. Two channels of -48 V power supply are diverted into a PDF where lightning protection and overcurrent protection operations are performed and finally six groups of -48 V power supplies are distributed to the functional frames in the cabinet. In addition, the PDF keeps monitoring the voltage of lead-in power and the state of distributed power. When detecting a fault, it generates an audio-visual alarm. The PDF consists of three parts: z
Monitoring unit
z
Lightning protection unit
z
Power output unit
Figure 1-19 shows the details.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-26
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
-48V1 BGND -48V2 BGND
Lightningprotection unit
PGND
Detecting lightningrelated faults
-48V2
Power output unit -48v1
SW4 SW5 SW6
SW1 SW2 SW3 BGND J7
Monitor unit
BGND
-48v2
External sensor
-48V1
J8
Air breaker
J1 Air J2 breaker J3 fault J4 detection J5 J6
I
II
III
MUTE ALM RS485 RUN port indicator indicator switch
IV
V
VI
Power output
Figure 1-19 Architecture of PDF The monitor unit contains two boards—power distribution monitor & control board (WDMB) and signals transfer board (WSTB) . The monitor unit detects and reports through RS485 serial port the status of two –48 VDC inputs, temperature, humidity, air-breaker, and lightning-protection unit. The lightning-protection unit contains two boards—overvoltage protection board (WOPB) and overvoltage protection transfer board (WOTB). It suppresses the overvoltage and overcurrent surges on the DC power input interfaces, and ensures the integrity of the SoftX3000 power system. The power output unit contains six –48V air breakers.
1.5.2 Appearance of Power Distribution Frame Figure 1-20 shows the appearance of the PDF.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-27
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
(1) WSTB (2) 16-pin terminal block (3) 6-pin terminal block (4) Bundling bulge (5) WOPB (6) Plastic (7) Air breaker (8) PDF body (9) Cable-through holes for air-breaker monitoring cables
Figure 1-20 Appearance of the PDF The PDF complies with the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) 297 standard. The dimensions of PDF are 88.9 mm (2 U, height) x 482.6 mm (19 inch, width) x 476.2 mm (depth).
1.5.3 Front View of Power Distribution Frame Figure 1-21 shows the front view of the PDF.
(1) Running indicator (2) Alarm indicator (4)~(6) -48V1 outlet control switches (7)~(9) -48V2 outlet control switches (10) Front of lightning protection unit
Figure 1-21 Front view of the PDF
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-28
(3) Sound/mute switch
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
There are two indicators on the front of the PDF. Table 1-3 shows the meanings of the indicators. Table 1-3 Meanings of the indicators on the front of the PDF Indicat or
Full name
Color
State Blinking frequency 0.5 Hz
Running indicator
RUN
Green
Alarm indicator
ALM
Red
Meaning of state
is
There are power inputs, and the PDF is working well.
Blinking frequency is 4 Hz
The board is not running. The communication with SMUI is interrupted.
Off
There is no power input, or the PDF fails.
On or blinking fast
Alarming, indicating faults in the PDF.
Off
There is no fault.
The sound/mute switch on the front is used to select whether or not to produce alarm sound pertaining to the power distribution frame. If the switch is ON, alarm sound will be produced whenever a fault is encountered in the power distribution frame. If the switch is OFF, alarm sound will be muted when a fault is encountered in the PDF. Table 1-4 shows the relationship between the six power control switches and the internal components of the cabinets. Table 1-4 Relationship between the components and the control switch Cabinet type
Integrated cabinet
configuration
Component
Control switch
Active iGWB
SW2, SW4
Standby iGWB
SW1, SW3
BAM
SW3, SW4
Hard disk array (Only when using IBM server)
SW1, SW6
LAN Switch 0
SW3
LAN Switch 1
SW2
KVMS
SW4
Basic frame 0
SW4, SW5
Expansion frame 1
SW5, SW6
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-29
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Cabinet type
Service processing cabinet
MRS cabinet
Component
Control switch
Expansion frame 2
SW5, SW6
Expansion frame 3
SW3, SW4
Expansion frame 4
SW2, SW3
Expansion frame 5
SW1, SW2
MRS frame
SW1, SW2
1.5.4 Rear View of Power Distribution Frame There are input and output terminal blocks and monitor ports on the rear of the PDF, as shown in Figure 1-22.
(1) Power input terminal block (3) External ports from WDMC
(2) Power output terminal block
Figure 1-22 Back view of the PDF The PDF receives two –48 V power inputs and provides six independent –48 V power outputs. The connection positions of –48V power cables and BGND are marked on the power input and output terminal busbar. The PDF provides the following external interfaces: z
One RS485 serial port
z
Five detection interfaces of external Boolean value
z
One cascade inlet and one cascade outlet for cabinet indicator alarm
z
One cabinet indicator interface
z
One alarm row indicator interface
z
One alarm column indicator interface
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-30
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Monitor cable of the PDF is connected to the RS485 serial port marked with COM1 and COM2. The PDF receives two –48 V power inputs and provides six independent –48 V power outputs. The connection positions of –48V power cables and BGND are marked on the power input and output terminal busbar. The PDF provides two RS485 serial ports, five external Boolean-value detection interfaces, one cabinet concatenation input interface, one cabinet concatenation output interface, one alarm column LED, and one alarm row LED. The monitor cables of the PDF connect with COM1 and COM2 RS485 serial ports. Table 1-5 shows the functions of the external interfaces on the PDF. Table 1-5 Functions of external interfaces on the WDMB of the PDF Name
Function
Remark
COM1
Active RS485 serial port
COM2
Standby RS485 serial port
Connecting the WSMU with the monitor cables of the PDF
COM4
Serial port
Not used
P2
Inverter alarm input interface
Not used
J113
Cabinet concatenation output interface
J114
Cabinet concatenation input interface
J112
Cabinet alarm row LED
J111
Cabinet alarm column LED
J106
Reserved interface
Boolean-value
detection
J105
Reserved interface
Boolean-value
detection
J104
Flood switch interface
1.5.5 Technical Specifications of Power Distribution Frame Table 1-6, Table 1-7, Table 1-8, and Table 1-9 shows the technical specifications of the PDF. Table 1-6 Input specifications of the PDF Item
Specifications
Rated voltage
input
Range of voltage
input
–48V –72V to –36V
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-31
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Item
Specifications
Input mode Maximum current
Two –48 V inputs or one –48 V input input
Two –48 V, 150 A inputs, working in hot backup mode.
Table 1-7 Output specifications of the PDF Item
Specifications
Rated output voltage
–48 V
Range of output voltage
–72 V to –36V
Output tributary
70 A: Six 70 A connection-controllable, short-circuit protected tributaries
Output features
70 A: 87.5 A at protection point, manual recovery
protection
Rated output power
Hot backup mode: 5500 W (–48 V)
Table 1-8 EMC specifications of the PDF Item Electromagnetic interference (EMI)
Sub-item
Specifications
Radiant disturbances
ed Class B test of CISPR22.
Conducted disturbances
ed Class B test of CISPR22.
Radiant susceptibility
10V/m, 80% AM (1 kHz) on shell
ESD
discharge: ±6 kV.Air discharge: ±8 kV
Instant pulse
Bestow a test signal of 5/50 ns, 5-kHz Rep. freq on the signal cables (0.5 kV) and power cables (1 kV). The cables are working normally.
Conducted susceptibility
Bestow a test signal of 0.15–80 MHz, 3 V, 80% AM (1 kHz) on the power cables and signal cables. The cables are working normally.
Surging current
Bestow a test signal of 1.2/50 µs, 2 kV for common mode and 1 kV for differential mode, on the power cables. The power cables are working normally
Electromagnetic susceptibility (EMS)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-32
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Table 1-9 Other specifications of the PDF Item
Sub-item
Specifications
Differential mode protection
Cast five times of 8/2-µs, 3-kA test current between the –48-V BGND and PGND in both directions. The residual voltage ≤200 V.
Common-mode protection
Cast five times of 8/2-µs, 5-kA test current between the –48-V BGND and PGND in both directions. The residual voltage ≤ 300 V.
Working temperature
–10°C – +50°C
Storage temperature
-40°C– +70°C
Relatively humidity
≤95%
DC lightning protection
Environment
Environment
ed IEC60950, EN60950, UL60950, and GB4943 certifications.
Safety
1.6 Air Deflector 1.6.1 Functions of Air Deflector As show in Figure 1-23, an air deflector is used to smooth and divert air to a different direction and separate heat dissipation channels of the frames, so that air can be taken in from the front and exhausted to the rear. Moreover, the pressure consumption of the air can be minimized through an air deflector.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-33
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Power distribution frame Service frame
Fan box Air deflector
Service frame Front of a cabinet
Rear of a cabinet Fan box Air deflector Service frame
Fan box
Figure 1-23 Heat dissipation channel inside a cabinet (side view)
1.6.2 Appearance of Air Deflector An air deflector is 2 U high and 373.3 mm deep. There are a number of ventilation holes on its plastic front , as shown in Figure 1-24.
Figure 1-24 Air deflector structure
1.7 KVMS 1.7.1 Functions of KVMS The KVMS is an integration of keyboard, video, mouse, and switcher installed in the SoftX3000 cabinet. It provides four groups of interfaces. Each group has one keyboard interface, one mouse interface, and one LCD interface. You can connect with the four groups of interfaces to monitor the BAM, active iGWB, and standby iGWB, using three separate computers. To switch between these three servers, use the OSD menu.
1.7.2 Appearance of KVMS Figure 1-25 shows the appearance of the KVMS.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-34
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Figure 1-25 Appearance of KVMS Figure 1-26 shows the appearance of the unfolded KVMS.
Figure 1-26 Appearance of the unfolded KVMS The KVMS provides four groups of interfaces from its rear . Each group has one keyboard interface, one mouse interface, and one LCD interface. It also provides a power input terminal and a protection grounding connection terminal.
Figure 1-27 Rear view of KVMS
1.7.3 Technical Specifications of KVMS Table 1-10 shows the technical specifications of the KVMS.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-35
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Table 1-10 Technical specifications of the KVMS Category
Item
Mechanical specificatio ns
Dimensions
445mm (width) x 42mm (height) x 423mm (depth)
Model and size of LCD
15.1” TFT LCD
Monitor interface
HD-DB-15 male
Keyboard and mouse interfaces
PS/2
Input
–48V, 2A
Output
–12V, 5A
Scan interval
3, 8, 15, and 30 seconds
Interface type Electrical performanc e
Performanc e specificatio ns
Environme nt requiremen ts
Length cable
of
Specifications
signal
30 m at maximum
Display resolution
1024 x 768, at 85 Hz of refresh rate
Keyboard repeat rate (typing speed)
10, 15, 20 or 30 characters per second
Working temperature
0ºC – 50ºC
Storage temperature
–20ºC – +60ºC
1.8 LAN Switch 1.8.1 Functions of LAN Switch In an integrated configuration cabinet, Huawei Quidway S3528G LAN Switch (hereinafter referred to as the S3528G) interconnects frames and servers, achieves dual
planes
for
inter-component
communication
channels,
and
provides
inter-component communication and active/standby configuration functions.
Note: For the details of S3528G service features, refer to Quidway S3500 Series Ethernet Switches Operation Manual.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-36
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.8.2 Front View of LAN Switch On
the
front
of
the
S3528G,
there
are
power
LED,
24
fixed
10Base-T/100Base-TX Ethernet interfaces and the Console interface. Figure 1-28 shows the details. (1)
(2)
(3) (4)
(5)
(1) Power LED (4) Mode switching status LED (6) GBIC interface and LED
(7)
(6)
(2) GBIC interface status LED (3) Mode switch button (5) 10Base-T/100 Base-TX interface LED (7) Console
Figure 1-28 Front view of S3528G Table 1-11 lists the meaning of LEDs on the front of the S3528G. Table 1-11 Description of LEDs on the front of S3528G LED name
Identity
Power LED
Mode LED
switching
10Base-T/100Base-TX interface LED (when mode switching status LED is A/L) (default)
Meaning
On
Power on
Off
Power off
A/L
On
D/S
Off
Indicates the 100Mbit/s interface ACTIVE/LINK status
A/L
Off
D/S
On
PWR
status
Status
ACTIVE (Orange)
LINK (Green)
On
Sending and receiving data
Off
Not sending or receiving data
On
Connected
Off
Disconnected
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-37
Indicates the 100Mbit/s interface DUPLEX/SPEED status
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
LED name
Identity
10Base-T/100Base-TX interface LED (when mode switching status LED is D/S)
Status
DUPLEX (Orange)
SPEED (Green)
ACTIVE (Orange) GBIC interface status LED LINK (Green)
Meaning
On
Interface duplex
working
in
Off
Interface working in half duplex
On
Interface speed is 100 Mbit/s
Off
Interface speed is 10 Mbit/s
On
Sending and receiving data
Off
Not sending or receiving data
On
Connected
Off
Disconnected
1.8.3 Rear View of LAN Switch Figure 1-29 shows the rear view of the S3528G. There are two DC power sockets and a grounding post.
(1)
(2)
(1) DC power socket
(3)
(2) Backup DC power socket
(3) Grounding post
Figure 1-29 Rear view of S3528G
1.8.4 Technical Specifications of LAN Switch Table 1-12 shows the technical specifications of the S3528G. Table 1-12 Technical specifications of the S3528G Item
Specifications
Dimensions
436.2 mm (width) x 42 mm (height) x 240 mm (depth) (not including plastic decorative )
Weight
≤5kg
Backplane switching capacity
32 Gbit/s
Port switching capacity
12.8 Gbit/s
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-38
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Item
Specifications
Management port
One console port
Fixed port
24 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet electric interfaces (RJ-45 connector); four GBIC module interfaces
Optional module
None
Serviced performance
10/100BASE-TX
Port type
1000BASE-GBIC Rated voltage: –48V to –60V Maximum voltage: –36V to –72V
voltage inputted
ing redundancy power input Power consumption (full load)
40 W
Temperature
0 C to 45 C
Relatively humidity
10% to 90%
o
o
1.9 Cabling Trough 1.9.1 Functions of Cabling Trough The cabling trough and cabling rack are used for laying and bundling cables in SoftX3000 cabinets. The cabling trough is configured below the LAN Switch. The network cables leading out of the LAN Switch front are laid across the cabling trough to the back of the cabinet. There are three cabling racks—horizontal cabling rack (1 U), rear cabling rack (1 U), and side-hung fiber management tray (FMT).
1.9.2 Appearance and Architecture of Cabling Trough The cabling trough is 1 U in height. There are many U-shaped troughs for cable lead-ins. On the bottom plate, there are ventilation holds. Refer to Figure 1-30 for appearance and architecture.
(1) Mount angle
Figure 1-30 Appearance and architecture of cabling trough
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-39
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.10 IBM EXP400 Hard Disk Array 1.10.1 Overview of Hard Disk Array The IBM EXP4000 hard disk array is required in IBM X343 server used as the iGWB server. The hard disk array accomplishes the redundancy backup of the billing data.
1.10.2 Appearance of Hard Disk Array The IBM EXP400 hard disk array is in standard 19-inch architecture. It is installed in the cabinet through two independent rails—one in the left and the other in the right. The IBM EXP400 hard disk array is installed together with IBM X343 server in the cabinet. Figure 1-31 shows its architecture from the rear side angle of view.
(1) Blank tray (2) Bridge card (4) Enclosure Services Module (5) Power supply (7) Chassis assembly with midplane
(3) Front bezel assembly (6) Rails, left and right
Figure 1-31 Diagram of IBM EXP400 hard disk array The RAID adapter of each iGWB server connects with the interface of one channel of the IBM EXP400 hard disk array. One iGWB server controls the left seven hard disks through the left channel, while the other iGWB server controls the right seven hard disks through the right channel. The two channels do not interfere with each other.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-40
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.10.3 Front View of Hard Disk Array The hard disk array contains 14 hard disk drawers, and is divided into two separate channels linked by a bridge card. Each channel can hold seven hard disks at maximum. The hard disks are equipped in a pluggable, architecture. Refer to Figure 1-32 for details.
Figure 1-32 Front view of IBM EXP400 hard disk array On the bay of each hard disk, there are two LEDs which indicate the working status of the hard disk. There are three LEDs on the upper left part of the front of the hard disk array. Table 1-13 shows the meanings of the LEDs. Table 1-13 Meaning of LEDs on the front of the hard disk array LED name Power-on LED
Generalsystem- error LED
Box identity LED
Status LED
Color
Status On
There is power input. The power supply is normal in the hard disk array.
Off
There is no power input, or the power module is faulty.
On
Alarm state, meaning that the hard disk array is faulty.
Off
No fault.
On
The hard disk array is identified by the server.
Off
The hard disk array is not identified by the server.
On
Hard disk is faulty.
Flashing
The server is identifying or restarting the hard disk.
Off
The hard disk is working normally.
Green
Amber
Blue
Amber
Meaning
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-41
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
LED name Activity LED
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Color Green
Status Flashing
Meaning The hard disk is reading and writing data.
1.10.4 Rear View of Hard Disk Array The rear part of the hard disk array is also divided into two independent parts—a left part and a right part. Each part contains a power module and an enclosure services module (ESM). The two modules are pluggable. Each ESM provides a small computer systems interface (SCSI) to connect the server. Figure 1-33 shows the details.
Figure 1-33 Rear view of IBM EXP400 hard disk array Table 1-14 shows the meanings of LEDs on the rear of the hard disk array. Table 1-14 Meaning of LEDs on the rear of the hard disk array LAD name Termination-power LED
LVD/SE LED
Activity LED
Color
Status On
The power supply to the peer server is normal.
Off
The power supply to the peer server is faulty.
On
The external host bus is in low voltage differential (LVD) mode.
Off
The external host bus single-ended(SE) mode.
Flashin g
The hard disk is reading and writing data.
Green
Green
Green
Meaning
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-42
is
in
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
LAD name SCSI reset LED
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Color Green
Fault LED
Amber
AC power LED
Green
DC power LED
Green
Fault LED
Amber
Status
Meaning
On
The SCSI bus is resetting.
On
The ESM is faulty.
Off
The ESM is working normally.
On
The AC power supply is normal.
Off
The AC power supply is faulty.
On
The DC power supply is normal.
Off
The DC power supply is faulty.
On
A power supply failure or that a redundant power supply is not turned on.
Flashin g
The built-in fan fails.
Off
Power supply is normal.
1.10.5 Technical Specifications of Hard Disk Array Table 1-15 shows the technical specifications of the hard disk array. Table 1-15 Technical specifications of hard disk array Category Mechanical specifications
Electrical performance External interfaces
Environment requirements
Item
Specifications
Dimensions
447 mm (Width) x 128 mm (Height) x 540 mm (Depth)
Weight
37.3 kg in full configuration
Rated voltage
–48V
Rated current
5A
Range of input power
60W – 450W
Ultra320 SCSI
2
Working temperature
10ºC–40ºC
Temperature variation
No more than 10ºC per hour
Relatively humidity
20% – 80%, non-condensing
Humidity variation
No more than 10% per hour
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-43
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.11 BAM and iGWB Server (HP Server) 1.11.1 Functions of BAM and iGWB Server (HP Server) The BAM is the server of the operation and maintenance (OAM) system. It bridges the workstations and the SoftX3000. The BAM forwards the OAM commands from local and remote workstations to SoftX3000, and sends the response messages from SoftX3000 to the workstations. The BAM also stores and transfers the alarm and traffic measurement data. The iGWB server is an intermediate billing device between SoftX3000 and the billing center. It receives, pre-processes, and stores bills at a speed of 1700 CDRs per second. The iGWB server also provides billing interface. The iGWB server works in active/standby mode. The BAM and the iGWB server are configured in fixed positions in the integrated configuration cabinet. Both adopt HP ProLiant DL380 G3 server.
1.11.2 View of iGWB Server I. Front View of iGWB Server Figure 1-34 shows the front view of iGWB server.
(1) Hard disk drive bay (six in total)
(2) Floppy disk drive
(3) CD-ROM drive
Figure 1-34 Front view of iGWB/BAM server At the right side of the front of the server, there is a line of indicators. See Figure 1-35.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-44
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
(1) Internal status indicator (4) NIC2 connection indicator
(2) External status indicator (5) UID indicator
(3) NIC1 connection indicator (6) Power button/ indicator
Figure 1-35 Front view of iGWB/BAM server
II. Rear View of iGWB Server Figure 1-36 shows the rear view of iGWB server.
(1) Extended slot PCI-X 3 (for installing network adapter 1) (2) Extended slot PCI-X 2 (for installing network adapter 0) (3) Extended slot PCI-X 1 (4) Serial port (5) iLO interface (6) Mouse interface (7) Power socket (8) VHDCI SCSI interface (9) Monitor interface (10) USB interface (11) NIC connection interface (matching with network adapters 2 and 3) (12) Keyboard interface
Figure 1-36 Rear view of iGWB/BAM server Figure 1-37 shows the indicators on the back of iGWB/BAM server.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-45
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
(1) PCI slot 3 hot-swap fault indicator (3) PCI slot 2 hot-swap fault indicator (5) RJ-45 interface connection indicator (7) UID indicator/ button
(2) PCI slot 3 hot-swap power indicator (4) PCI slot 2 hot-swap power indicator (6) RJ-45 interface activation indicator (8) Power indicator
Figure 1-37 Rear view of iGWB/BAM server
1.11.3 Technical Specifications of BAM and iGWB Server The power consumption of HP ProLiant DL380 G3 server is 250 W. Table 1-16 shows its hardware configurations. Table 1-16 Hardware settings of HP server Configuration
Item
BAM
iGWB
U
Two Xeon DP 2.4GHz U or higher processors
Hard disk
Two 36-GB hard disks (10,000 RPM SCSI hard disks)
Memor y
4 × 256 MB
Networ k adapter RAID adapter
5 × 73GB
2 x 100/1000 Mbit/s integrated network adaptors 2 x 10/100 Mbit/s extended network adaptors Integrated Smart Array 5i Plus, single channel
Note: The hardware configuration of the BAM and iGWB server may be updated; so the preceding configuration is for reference only.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-46
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
1.12 BAM and iGWB Server (IBM Server) 1.12.1 Functions of BAM and iGWB Server The BAM is the server of the operation and maintenance (OAM) system. It bridges the workstations and the SoftX3000. The BAM forwards the OAM commands from local and remote workstations to SoftX3000, and sends the response messages from SoftX3000 to the workstations. The BAM also stores and transfers the alarm and traffic measurement data. The iGWB server is an intermediate billing device between SoftX3000 and the billing center. It receives, pre-processes, and stores bills at a speed of 1700 CDRs per second. The iGWB server also provides billing interface. The iGWB server works in active/standby mode. The BAM and the iGWB server are configured in fixed positions in the integrated configuration cabinet. Both adopt IBM X343 server.
1.12.2 Front View of BAM and iGWB Server Figure 1-38 shows the front view of the iGWB server with the bezel.
A Bezel B Peripheral bay D Power switch E Reset switch G Major alarm indicator H Minor alarm indicator J Network adapter status indicator L Power supply status indicator M Bezel removal N Hard drive tray thumbscrews
C NMI switch F Critical alarm indicator I Power alarm indicator K Hard disk status indicator
Figure 1-38 Front view of iGWB/BAM server with bezel Figure 1-39 shows the front view of the server with the bezel removed.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-47
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
A Floppy drive B CD-ROM drive C Front switches and indicators D Hard drive tray E Left SCSI drive bay F Hard drive tray ribbon cable connector G Hard drive tray power H Right SCSI drive bay connector
Figure 1-39 Front view of iGWB/BAM server with bezel removed
1.12.3 Rear View of BAM and iGWB Server Figure 1-40 shows the back view of the iGWB server.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-48
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
A Three half-length 64-bit, 66 MHz PCI add-in board slots (3.3 V riser board) B DB-15 male connector for front alarm relay s C Three full height, full length 64-bit, 33 MHz PCI add-in board slots (5 V riser board), upper one of which is used for RAID adapter (with SCSI interfaces and disk array cables), and the other two of which are used for network adapters 2 and 3 D Redundant, hot-plug power supplies E Four-terminal DC input power connector for DC input power supply cage F USB port 1 G Video connector H External wide SCSI Ultra160 68-pin connector I Dual NIC 10/100 E/N RJ45 connectors NIC 1 (lower) and NIC 2 (upper), of which the upper one is used for network adapter 1 and the lower one is used for network adapter 0. J The PS/2 port can accept both keyboard and mouse. Use the included “Y” splitter cable to connect a mouse and a keyboard to the PS/2 port at the same time. K Serial port (COM2), 8-pin RJ45 connector L USB port 0 M Two grounding plugs for attachment of grounding wire to chassis
Figure 1-40 Back view of iGWB/BAM server
1.12.4 Technical Specifications of BAM and iGWB Server The power consumption of IBM X343 server is 350 W. Table 1-17 shows its hardware configurations. Table 1-17 Hardware settings of IBM X343 server Item
Configuration BAM
iGWB
U
Two Intel Pentium III 1.26 GHz or higher processors
Hard disk
Two 36-GB hard disks (10,000 RPM SCSI hard disks)
Two 34-GB hard disks (10,000 RPM SCSI hard disks) Ten 73-GB hard disks (hard disk array)
Memory
Two 1-GB memory chips
Network adapter
Four 10/100-Mbit/s network adapters
RAID adapter
Single ServeRAID-4L adapter
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-49
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
Note: The hardware configuration of the BAM server may be updated; so the preceding configuration is for reference only.
1.13 Workstation 1.13.1 Functions of Workstation There are three types of workstations used in SoftX3000: z
Emergency workstation
z
Maintenance terminal
z
Operation terminal
The workstation serves the following purposes: z
Data configuration
z
Data backup
z
Equipment status query
z
Equipment maintenance
The emergency workstation automatically backs up BAM data every four hours by default. When BAM is down, the emergency workstation will work as BAM with the backup data. When BAM recovers, the normal work mode is resumed. Therefore, the emergency workstation is the backup device for BAM.
1.13.2 Technical Specifications of Workstation The workstation is a desktop PC, and is not installed in the cabinet. Table 1-18 lists the hardware requirements of workstation. Table 1-18 Hardware requirements of workstation Component
Specifications
U
Pentium IV 1.7 GHz or higher
Memory
512 MB
Hard disk
40 GB
Floppy drive
1
CD-ROM
1
Integrated graphic card and sound card
Integrated in the motherboard
10/100 Mbit/s interface card
One (three for emergency workstation)
auto-sensing
network
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-50
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 1 Cabinet and Internal Components
In addition, the emergency workstation requires an MO drive.
Note: The hardware of the emergency workstation might be different from the manual.
1.14 Universal Alarm Box The universal alarm box, also known as GM12ALMZ alarm box, is designed with chassis architecture of advanced techniques and optimal layout. The design of the universal alarm box fully considers operability, maintainability, and security. Figure 1-41 shows the appearance of the universal alarm box.
Figure 1-41 Appearance of the universal alarm box For detailed installation procedure and cable connections, refer to Universal Alarm Box Manual delivered with the alarm box.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-51
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame 2.1 Introduction to the Chapter This chapter details the features, classification, and composition of the open standard telecom architecture (OSTA) frame used in SoftX3000 cabinets. The chapter also elaborates on the fan box, which is an internal component of the OSTA frame.
2.2 Overview of OSTA Frame The frame is an independent working unit, which is composed of boards plugged in the same backplane. SoftX3000 adopts the OSTA hardware platform. The OSTA platform has four types of backplane buses: z
Shared resource bus
z
Ethernet bus
z
H.110 bus
z
Serial bus
The OSTA frame features high adaptability and reliability. This is applicable to the exchange and transfer of length-variable data packets of the softswitch.
2.3 Features of OSTA Frame The OSTA platform is structured in a standard frame which is 19 inches wide and 9U high. Each OSTA frame is equipped with a pluggable fan box at its lower part, as shown in Figure 2-1
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-1
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
(1) Fan box
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
(2) Front view of OSTA frame
(3) Rear view of OSTA frame
Figure 2-1 Appearance of OSTA frame Service frame has the following features. z
A frame is 19 inches wide and 9U high, conforming to IEC297.
z
A fan box is installed at the bottom of each service frame.
z
A frame accommodates both front boards and back boards
z
All the front boards and back boards are plugged in the backplane.
z
All cables are led out from the back of the frame.
z
Each frame has 21 slots.
z
A frame has temperature detection and fan speed adjustment functions.
2.4 Board Allocation of OSTA Frame All OSTA frames share the same hardware architecture. Each frame is designed with 21 standard slots. The following boards are always configured in fixed positions: z
System Management Units (SMUIs)
z
System Interface Units (SIUIs)
z
Hot-Swap and Control Units (HSCIs)
z
Alarm Units (ALMIs)
z
Universal Power Modules (UPWRs) (occupying the width of 2 standard board slots)
These boards occupy 9 slots in total. The remaining 12 slots are used for service boards (front boards) and interface boards (back boards). Figure 2-2 shows the board allocation specifics.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-2
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame (2)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(4)
(5)
(6) (7)
(1) Power boards (4) Back boards (7) Service boards
(8)
(2) Interface boards (5) Backplanes (8) System management boards
(7)
(9)
(1)
(3) Ethernet communication boards (6) Front boards (9) Alarm board
Figure 2-2 Board allocation in an OSTA frame The board design in the OSTA frame separates the functions of front boards and back boards. It simplifies the design of boards and unifies the functions to be provided by each board, reducing hardware complexity, improving system reliability, frame adaptability, and configuration flexibility.
2.5 Fan Box 2.5.1 Overview of Fan Box A fan box is installed at the bottom of each service frame. It is designed for heat dissipation. The fan box is made of plastic parts. Each fan box accommodates six fans. The diameter of each fan is 119 mm, and the thickness is 32 mm.
2.5.2 Functions of Fan Box A speed adjustment technique is used in the fans. On the premise of normal heat dissipation and reliable running, the rotation speed of the fans can be controlled. The fans are hot-swappable. The running state of the fans can be known by observing the indicators. The fan box can be maintained through a remote network management terminal.
2.5.3 Front View of Fan Box The front view of a fan box is shown in Figure 2-3. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-3
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
(1) Captive screw
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
(2) Fan state indicator
Figure 2-3 Front view of a fan box If the state indicator turns green and blinks at a frequency of 1 Hz, it means that all the fans work well. Otherwise, the fans might work abnormally, the communication monitor board might be faulty, or the power supply for the fan box might fail.
2.5.4 Technical Specifications of Fan Box Input voltage: –58 V – 40 V Maximum power consumption of a fan box: 105 W Communication rate through RS485: 9.6 kbit/s
2.6 Classification of Frames 2.6.1 Overview of Frame Classification The DIP switch on the SIUI determines the frame number. The SMUI reads the DIP switch on the SIUI and retrieves frame number. For the relationship between the DIP-switch settings of the SIUI and the frame number, refer to chapter 3 “Boards” for details. Depending on different board types configured, SoftX3000 frames fall into four types: z
Basic frame 0
z
Basic frame 1
z
Expansion frame
z
Media resource frame.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-4
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
2.6.2 Basic Frame 0 I. Functions of Basic Frame 0 Basic frame 0 must be configured in the integrated configuration cabinet. The basic frame 0 provides a number of external interfaces such as clock, E1, and IP. A basic frame 0 can provide all service processing capabilities. In the basic frame 0, CKIIs, IFMIs/BFIIs and CDBIs can be configured.
II. Board Allocation of Basic Frame 0 Figure 2-4 shows the configuration of front boards and back boards in basic frame 0.
Back Board
B F I I
B F I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
S I U I
H S C I
S I U I
H S C I
Slot No
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
I F M I
F C C U / F C S U
F C C U / F C S U
F C C U / F C S U
F C C U / F C S U
Front Board
I F M I
S M U I
S M U I
C K I I
10
C D B I
C K I I
U P W R
11
12
13
14
15
16
C D B I
B S G I / M S G I
B S G I / M S G I
B S G I / M S G I
B S G I / M S G I
A L U I
17
U P W R
18
19
U P W R
20
U P W R
Figure 2-4 Board allocation in basic frame 0
III. Board Configuration Guide of Basic Frame 0 The SMUIs, SIUIs, HSCIs, ALUI, and UPWRs must be configured in fixed positions in basic frame 0. Table 2-1 shows the details. Table 2-1 Board positions in basic frame 0 Board name
Slot number
Front or Back
SMUI
6 and 8
Front
HSCI
7 and 9
Back
ALUI
16
Front
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-5
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
Board name
Slot number
UPWR
CKII
Front or Back
17+18
Front and Back
19+20
Front and Back
12+13
Back
14+15
Back
The IFMIs and BFIIs in the left half frame and CDBIs in the right half frame must be configured. Their configuration slots are fixed. When the networking is to provide narrowband signaling interfaces, the following board should be configured: z
Fixed calling control unit and signaling process units (FCSUs)
z
E1_pool interface units (EPIIs)
z
CKIIs
z
Broadband signaling gateway boards (BSGIs)
z
Multimedia signaling gateway units (MSGIs)
When the networking is not to provide narrowband signaling interfaces, the following boards are required: z
Fixed calling control units (FCCUs)
z
BSGIs
z
MSGIs
An FCSU and an EPII must be configured in pairs and inserted in the same slots at the front and back. The back slots 12 – 16 are always reserved for the CKIIs. The FCCU/FCSU/BSGI/MSGI compatible slots are front slots 2 – 5 and 12 – 15. It is recommended to configure FCCUs/FCSUs from left to right and BSGIs/MSGIs from right to left. For empty slots without boards configured, it is required to cover them with blank filler s.
2.6.3 Basic Frame 1 I. Functions of Basic Frame 1 When the number of equivalent subscribers is greater than 500,000, basic frame 1 must be configured. A basic frame 1 provides IP and Ethernet interfaces externally, and can provide all service processing capabilities. For every increase of 500,000 equivalent subscribers, add a pair of IFMIs in basic frame 1 to provide external IP and Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-6
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
Ethernet interfaces. When the number of equivalent subscribers is greater than 1,000,000, add a pair of CDBIs in the basic frame 1.
Note: Because a maximum of 4 pairs of IFMIs and 2 pairs of CDBIs are configured in
z
SoftX3000, at most one basic frame 0 and one basic 1 are required for the whole system. In the basic frame 1, CKIIs cannot be configured but IP Forward Modules
z
(IFMIs)/Back insert FE Interface Units (BFIIs) and Central Database Boards (CDBIs) can be configured. The IFMIs/BFIIs provide IP interfaces. In the basic frame 0, CKIIs, IFMIs/BFIIs and CDBIs can be configured.
II. Board Allocation of Basic Frame 1 Figure 2-5 shows the configuration of front boards and back boards in basic frame 1.
Back Board
B F I I
B F I I
B F I I / E P I I
Slot No
0
1
2
3
4
5
I F M I / F C C U / F C S U
I F M I / F C C U / F C S U
I F M I / F C C U / F C S U
I F M I / F C C U / F C S U
Front Board
I F M I
I F M I
B F I I / E P I I
B F I I / E P I I
B F I I / E P I I
S I U I
H S C I
S I U I
H S C I
6
7
8
9
S M U I
S M U I
U P W R
10
C D B I
11
12
13
14
15
16
C D B I
B S G I / M S G I
B S G I / M S G I
B S G I / M S G I
B S G I / M S G I
A L U I
17
U P W R
18
U P W R
19
20
U P W R
Figure 2-5 Board allocation in basic frame 1
III. Board Configuration Guide of Basic Frame 1 When there are more than two IFMIs or two CDBIs, basic frame 1 must be configured.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-7
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
SMUIs, SIUIs, HSCIs, ALUI, and UPWRs must be configured. SMUIs are configured invariably in the front slots 6 and 8, HSCIs configured in the back slots 7 and 9, ALUI in the front slot 16, and UPWRs in both front and back slots (17, 18) and (19, 20). In the slots 2– 5, IFMIs are preferred; in the slots 12 – 15, CDBIs are preferred. If empty front slots are still left after IFMIs and CDBIs have been inserted, the left slots are available for FCSUs, FCCUs, BSGIs, MSGIs and EPIIs. It is recommended to configure FCCUs/FCSUs from left to right and configure BSGIs/MSGIs from right to left. An FCSU and an EPII must be configured in pairs and inserted in the same slots at the front and back. For empty slots without boards configured, it is required to cover them with blank filler s.
2.6.4 Expansion Frame I. Functions of Expansion Frame The expansion frame is optional, and can be configured as service processing frames depending on the subscriber capacity. Expansion frames cannot exist by itself; they must cooperate with the basic frame 0 to provide service processing functions.
II. Board Allocation of Expansion Frame Figure 2-6 shows the configuration of front boards and back boards in the expansion frame.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-8
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
Back Board
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
S I U I
H S C I
S I U I
H S C I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
Slot No
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
F C S U / F C C U / B S G I / M S G I
F C S U / F C C U / B S G I / M S G I
F C S U / F C C U / B S G I / M S G I
F C S U / F C C U / B S G I / M S G I
F C S U / F C C U / B S G I / M S G I
F C S U / F C C U / B S G I / M S G I
B S G I / M S G I / F C S U / F C C U
B S G I / M S G I / F C S U / F C C U
B S G I / M S G I / F C S U / F C C U
B S G I / M S G I / F C S U / F C C U
B S G I / M S G I / F C S U / F C C U
B S G I / M S G I / F C S U / F C C U
A L U I
Front Board
S M U I
S M U I
U P W R
17
U P W R
18
19
U P W R
20
U P W R
Figure 2-6 Board allocation in the expansion frame
III. Board Configuration Guide of Expansion Frame SMUIs, SIUIs, HSCIs, ALUI, and UPWRs must be configured. SMUIs are configured invariably in the front slots 6 and 8, HSCIs configured in the back slots 7 and 9, ALUI in the front slot 16, and UPWRs in both front and back slots (17, 18) and (19, 20). Slots 0 – 5 and 10 – 15 are available for FCSUs, FCCUs, BSGIs, EPIIs and MSGIs. Number of expansion frames = MAX {ROUNDUP [(number of CDBIs + number of IFMIs + number of FCSUs + number of FCCUs + number of BSGIs + number of MSGIs)/12 - 1], 0}
Note: MAX { } means to get the maximum value. ROUNDUP() means to round up to a integer. For instance, ROUNDUP(0.4) = 1. A maximum of 12 slots are available for CDBIs, IFMIs, FCSUs, FCCUs, BSGIs and MSGIs in an expansion frame.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-9
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
An FCSU and an EPII must be configured in pairs and inserted in the same slots at the front and back. In each expansion frame, it is recommended to configure FCCUs/FCSUs from left to right in the left half and configure BSGIs/MSGIs from right to left in the right half. When empty slots are still left after FCCUs/FCSUs (BSGIs/MSGIs) have been configured in the left (right) half, the empty slots are available for BSGIs/MSGIs (FCCUs/FCSUs). For empty slots without boards configured, it is required to cover them with blank filler s.
2.6.5 Media Resource Frame I. Functions of Media Resource Frame If the capacity of equivalent subscribers is less than 100,000, a media resource frame is configured to provide resource media streams to implement MRS functions.
II. Board Allocation of Media Resource Frame Configuration of front and back boards in a media resource frame is illustrated in Figure 2-7.
Back Board
M R I A
M R I A
M R I A
M R I A
M R I A
M R I A
S I U I
H S C I
S I U I
H S C I
M R I A
M R I A
M R I A
M R I A
M R I A
M R I A
Slot No
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Front Board
M R C A
M R C A
M R C A
M R C A
M R C A
M R C A
S M U I
M R C A
M R C A
M R C A
M R C A
M R C A
M R C A
A L U I
S M U I
U P W R
17
U P W R
18
19
U P W R
20
U P W R
Figure 2-7 Board allocation in a media resource frame
III. Configuration Guide of Media Resource Frame A media resource frame is configured at the near top of the integrated configuration cabinet or of a service processing cabinet. Its frame number is 1 or 5. SMUIs, SIUIs, HSCIs, ALUI, and UPWRs must be configured. SMUIs are configured invariably in the front slots 6 and 8, HSCIs configured in the back slots 7 and 9, ALUI in the front slot 16, and UPWRs in both front and back slots (17, 18) and (19, 20).
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-10
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 2 OSTA Frame
A media resource control unit (MRCA) and a media resource interface unit (MRIA) are configured in pairs. The slots 0 – 5 and 10 – 15 are available for them. MRCAs and MRIAs must be configured at the same slot numbers. A maximum of 12 MRCAs and 12 MRIAs can be configured in one frame. Number of media resource frames = ROUNDUP (number of required MRCAs /12) It is recommended to configure MRCAs in available slots from both sides of the frame inwards. For empty slots without boards configured, it is required to cover them with blank filler s.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 2-11
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Chapter 3 Boards 3.1 Classification of Boards There are three types of boards in SoftX3000: Front board Back board Backplane Both the front boards and the back boards are inserted in the backplane. Table 3-1 lists the functions of the front boards, the back boards, and the backplane. Table 3-1 Functions of boards used in SoftX3000 Board
Function
Front board
Service processing boards and management control board
Back board
Protocol processing boards and interface boards
Backplane
Provides a communication channel for other boards
All SoftX3000 boards are hot-swappable. Some boards have a hot-swapping LED “OFFLINE” on the front and a hot-swapping switch on the ejector-lever. When you insert a board in the frame and restore the ejector lever, the hot-swapping switch is closed. When you push open the ejector lever, the switch is open. Then the MBUS module of the board sends a board-swapping request to the active SMUI in the frame and terminates all services in the board. When the hot-swapping LED is on, you can unplug the board. Figure 3-1 shows the board insertion mode in SoftX3000.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-1
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Backplane
Back board
Front board
Figure 3-1 Front board and back board Table 3-2 lists the boards used in SoftX3000. Table 3-2 List of boards Board
Corresponding front or back board
Frame
Position
FCCU
Basic frame and expansion frame
Front board
FCSU
Basic frame and expansion frame
Front board
EPII
Basic frame and expansion frame
Back board
IFMI
Basic frame
Front board
BFII
Basic frame
Back board
SMUI
Basic frame and expansion frame
Front board
SIUI
Basic frame and expansion frame
Back board
MRCA
Media resource frame
Front board
MRIA
Media resource frame
Back board
BSGI
Basic frame and expansion frame
Front board
None
MSGI
Basic frame and expansion frame
Front board
None
CDBI
Basic frame
Front board
None
Used in pairs
Used in pairs
Used in pairs
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-2
None
Used in pairs
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Board
Chapter 3 Boards
Corresponding front or back board
Frame
Position
ALUI
Basic frame and expansion frame
Front board
None
UPWR
Basic frame and expansion frame
Front or back board
UPWR
HSCI
Basic frame and expansion frame
Back board
None
CKII
Basic frame 0
Back board
None
Note: In the board names, “F” indicates Fixed network, and “I” stands for Integrated.
3.2 ALUI 3.2.1 Functions The Alarm Unit (ALUI) is a front board and installed in slot 16 in each frame. It provides the following functions: Communicating with the SMUI through the serial cable, and accepting the instructions and commands from the SMUI to control indicators. Checking the chassis temperature and reporting the related information to the SMUI through the serial port cable. Collecting fault detection signals and in-position signals of four power modules, reporting the logically synthesized signals as the working status of the power system to the SMUI through the serial port cable, and displaying power board working and in-position status by its indicators. Reporting error information and lighting the fault indicator when the temperature sensor is faulty.
3.2.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of ALUI covers two aspects: Interfaces Power consumption
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-3
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-3 Technical specifications of ALUI Category
Parameter
Specification
Interfaces
RS232 serial port
1
Power consumption
NA
2W
Remark When J5 and J7 in the board are shorted, this serial port is used as RS422 serial port to connect with the SMUI. When J6 and J8 in the board are shorted, this serial port is used as RS232 serial port provided on the front . None
3.2.3 Indicators Figure 3-2 shows the front of the ALUI. ALUI
RUN 00 01 02 03 04 05 07 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 UPWR UPWR
COM
RST
HUAWEI
Figure 3-2 Front of the ALUI Table 3-4 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the ALUI.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-4
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-4 Meanings of indicators on the front of the ALUI Indicat or
Meaning
Status description Red
Green
Off
RUN
Running indicator
Failed to communicate with the SMUI.
The board runs normally.
The board is faulty.
00
Back board 0 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
01
Back board 1 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
02
Back board 2 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
03
Back board 3 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
04
Back board 4 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
05
Back board 5 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
07
Back board 7 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
09
Back board 9 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
10
Back board 10 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
11
Back board 11 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
12
Back board 12 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
13
Back board 13 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
14
Back board 14 status indicator
The board faulty.
is
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-5
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Indicat or
Chapter 3 Boards
Status description
Meaning
Red
Green
Off
The board runs normally.
The board is not in position.
15
Back board 15 status indicator
The board faulty.
UPWR
Back power module status indicator
The power module is faulty.
The board runs normally.
The back power module is not in position.
UPWR
Back power module status indicator
The power module is faulty.
The board runs normally.
The back power module is not in position.
is
3.2.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
3.3 BFII 3.3.1 Functions The Back insert FE Interface Unit (BFII) is the back interface board of the IFMI. It is used to implement FE driver processing and enable the external physical interface of the IFMI. The BFII is configured in pair with IFMI. The BFIIs work in active/standby mode.
3.3.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of BFII covers two aspects: Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-5 Technical specifications of BFII Category
Parameter
Specification
Interfaces
10/100-Mbps Ethernet interface
1
Power consumption
NA
2W
3.3.3 Indicators Figure 3-3 shows the front of the BFII. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-6
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
10/100BT
BFII
HUAWEI
Figure 3-3 Front of the BFII
3.3.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers None
3.4 BSGI 3.4.1 Functions The Broadband Signaling Gateway (BSGI) is used to process the IP packets after the IFMI level-1 dispatch. It implements the following protocols: UDP SCTP MTP layer-2 adaptation (M2UA) M3UA V5UA IUA MG H.248
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-7
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
The BSGI then performs level-2 dispatch of such messages to the FCCU or FCSU for processing of transaction layer or service layer. Figure 3-4 shows the protocol stack of the BSGI.
M 2 U A
M 3 U A
V 5 U A
I U A
SCTP
MG Stack
H.248 Stack
UDP
IP BSGI
MAC IFMI
LAN Driver BFII
Figure 3-4 Protocol stack of the BSGI The alarm information generated by the BSGI is reported to the SMUI through the shared resource bus. The BSGIs work in load sharing mode.
3.4.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of BSGI covers three aspects: Functions Interfaces Power consumption
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-8
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-6 Technical specifications of BSGI Category
Functions
Parameter
Specification
Remark
H.248
1800 PPS
PPS means second.
MG
1500 PPS
None
M2UA
5000 PPS
None
M3UA
5000 PPS
None
V5UA
5000 PPS
None
IUA
5000 PPS
None
Interfaces
RS232 serial port
Power consumption
NA
1
16W
3.4.3 Indicators Figure 3-5 shows the front of the BSGI.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-9
packets
per
Used for commissioning; providing RJ45 sockets on the ; provided with hot-swappable protection. None
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
BSGI
ALM RUN
COM
RST
OFFLINE
Figure 3-5 Front of the BSGI Table 3-7 shows the meanings of indicators on the front of the BSGI. Table 3-7 Meanings of indicators on the front of the BSGI Indicator ALM
Meaning Fault indicator
Status description When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty Flashing period for loading program: 0.25 second
RUN
OFFLINE
Running indicator
Plug-in indicator
Flashing period for normal running of the active board: 2 seconds Flashing period for normal running of the standby board: 4 seconds When the board is plugged into a frame, if the blue indicator lights, it means that the board has ed the backplane and the ejector lever on the front can be pressed down to make the board fully inserted into the backplane. While pulling the board out, pull the ejector lever on the front . When the blue indicator lights, it is allowed to pull the board out.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-10
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
3.4.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
3.5 CDBI 3.5.1 Functions The Central Database Boards (CDBIs) are the front boards in basic frame 0 and basic frame 1. As the database of the equipment, the CDBI stores all data of the following aspects: Call location Gateway resources management Outgoing trunk circuit selection The CDBIs work in active/standby mode. At maximum, two pairs of CDBIs can be configured. The alarm information generated by the CDBI is reported to the SMUI through the shared resource bus.
3.5.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of CDBI covers three aspects: Functions Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-8 Technical specifications of CDBI Category
Parameter
Specification
Fixed subscriber locating
9000 times per second
Gateway resource management
5500 times per second
Outgoing trunk circuit selection of local office
6300 times per second
Tandem call circuit selection
4300 times per second
Interfaces
RS232 serial port
1
Power consumption
NA
16W
Functions
Functions
3.5.3 Indicators Figure 3-6 shows the front of the CDBI.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-11
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
CDBI
ALM RUN
COM
RST
OFFLINE
Figure 3-6 Front of the CDBI Table 3-9 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the CDBI. Table 3-9 Meanings of indicators on the front of the CDBI Indicator ALM
Meaning Fault indicator
Status description When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty Flashing period for loading program: 0.25 second
RUN
OFFLINE
Running indicator
Plug-in indicator
Flashing period for normal running of the active board: 2 seconds Flashing period for normal running of the standby board: 4 seconds When the board is plugged into a frame, if the blue indicator lights, it means that the board has ed the backplane and the ejector lever on the front can be pressed down to make the board fully inserted into the backplane. While pulling the board out, pull the ejector lever on the front . When the blue indicator lights, it is allowed to pull the board out.
3.5.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-12
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
3.6 CKII 3.6.1 Functions The Clock Interface Unit (CKII) is a back board of basic frame 0. Each CKII occupies two back slots—15 and 16, or 13 and 14. It provides the following functions: Providing the clock signals in conformity with the specifications of BELLCORE GR-1244-CORE stratum-2 clock, and ITU-T G.812 Type II clock. ing Synchronization Status Message (SSM) function in conformity with the ITU-T G.781 recommendation. Its external synchronous clock interface complying with the requirements of the ITU-T G.703 and ITU-T G.704 templates. The CKIIs work in active/standby mode.
3.6.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of CKII covers two aspects: Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-10 Technical specifications of CKII Category
Interfaces
Power consumption
Parameter
Specification
Remark
2 MHz or 2 Mbit/s clock input interface
2
Used to connect with BITS clock device.
E1 line 2 MHz clock input interface
2
Used to connect with the EPII to extract 2 MHz click signals as reference.
RS422 differential interface
16
8-kHz clock output interface, used to provide clock source for the EPIIs in the expansion frames.
NA
15 W
None
3.6.3 Indicators Figure 3-7 shows the front of the CKII.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-13
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
CKII
RUN ALM ACT BSTS1 BSTS2 LINE1 LINE2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
HUAWEI
Figure 3-7 Front of the CKII
Table 3-11 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the CKII. Table 3-11 Meanings of indicators on the front of the CKII Indicator
Meaning
RUN
Running indicator
ALM
Fault indicator
Status description
Flashing (2 seconds on and 2 seconds off) indicates that the board is to be configured. Flashing (1 second on and 1 second off) indicates that the board runs normally. When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-14
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Indicator
ACT
Chapter 3 Boards
Meaning
Active/stand by status indicator
Status description
When the indicator lights, it indicates the active board is being used. When the indicator is off, it indicates the standby board is being used.
3.6.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
3.7 EPII 3.7.1 Functions The EPII is the E1_Pool Interface Unit, and the back board of the FCSU. The EPII enables the following functions. Processing messages on MTP1 physical layer. Providing narrowband signaling physical interfaces for the FCSU. The EPII is configured in pair with FCSU. Implementing transfer of system clock and enabling clock synchronization function in a frame. Working with the front board FCSU to perform switchover between active and standby boards through H.110 bus. The EPIIs work in active/standby mode.
3.7.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of EPII covers three aspects: Functions Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-12 Technical specifications of EPII Category
Interfaces
Parameter
Specification
Remark
E1 interface
8
Used to connect with narrowband signaling network
8 kHz system clcok input interface
2
Used to connect with the CKII board.
2 MHz BITS clock output interface
2
Used to provide clock source for the CKII board.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-15
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Category
Power consumptio n
Chapter 3 Boards
Parameter
NA
Specification
4W
Remark
None
3.7.3 Indicators Figure 3-8 shows the front of the EPII. EPII
RUN ALM 2M-A
8K-A
2M-B
7 6 5
........... ...............
8
4 3 2 1
8K-B
E1/T1
HUAWEI
Figure 3-8 Front of the EPII
Table 3-13 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the EPII. Table 3-13 Meanings of indicators on the front of the EPII Indicator
Meaning
Status description
ALM
Fault indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is faulty.
RUN
Running indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is running normally.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-16
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
3.7.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers Table 3-14 elaborates the meaning and use of DIP switches S1–S5. Table 3-14 Meaning and usage of DIP switches Switch
Meaning
Switch choice
S1
Trunk cable selecting switch
75-ohm coaxial cable: 8-bit switch "ON"
75-ohm coaxial cable: switch “ON” indicates that the shell of the E1 receiving cable of the EPII is connected to the protection ground.
S2
Used to select whether the shell of the E1 receiving cable of the EPII is connected to the protection ground. Used to select whether the shell of the E1 transmitting cable of the EPII is connected to the protection ground.
75-ohm coaxial cable: switch “ON” indicates that the shell of the E1 transmitting cable of the EPII is connected to the protection ground.
S3
S4
Board switch
reset
S5
Used for commissioning and testing
120-ohm twisted pair: 8-bit switch "OFF"
The default status is “ON”. 120-ohm coaxial cable: switch “OFF” indicates that the shell of the E1 receiving cable of the EPII is not connected to the protection ground.
The default status is “ON”. 120-ohm coaxial cable: switch “OFF” indicates that the shell of the E1 transmitting cable of the EPII is not connected to the protection ground. None
None
3.8 FCCU 3.8.1 Functions The Fixed Calling Control Unit (FCCU) implements call control and processing of the following protocols: MTP3 ISUP INAP MG H.248 H.323 SIP R2
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-17
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Digital signaling system No.1 (DSS1) The FCCU also forwards the following types of messages: M3UA ISDN Q.921 adaptation (IUA) V5.2 adaptation (V5UA) Figure 3-9 shows the protocol stack of the FCCU.
ISUP
INAP
DSS1
V5.2
I U A
V 5 U A
MG
H.248
R2
SIP
H.323
TCAP SC
MTP3
M 3 U A
FCCU
MTP2
FCSU
EPII M 2 U A
M 3 U A
I U A
MG Stack
V 5 U A
H.248 Stack
SIP Stack
H.323 RAS
H.323 CALL
BSGI MTP1
SCTP
UDP
MSGI
UDP
T
IP
IP
Figure 3-9 Protocol stack of the FCCU
The FCCU generates and stores bills in its bill pool. Each FCCU can store a maximum of 160,000 bills. The generated bills are transmitted to iGWB in real time. The alarm information generated by the FCCU is reported to the SMUI through the shared resource bus.
Note:
The difference between the FCCU and the FCSU is that the FCSU can process narrowband signaling MTP2 messages while the FCCU cannot.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-18
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
The FCCUs work in active/standby mode.
3.8.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of FCCU covers three aspects: Functions Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-15 Technical specifications of FCCU Category
Parameter
Call processing capability
Maximum number of trunks
Specification
SIP and terminals: kBHCA/pair
H.323 500
MG and terminals: kBHCA/pair
H.248 300
50000/pair Maximum number of subscribers
BHCA is the acronym for Busy Hour Call Attempt.
9000/pair POST subscribers:
Functions
Remark
V5 subscribers: 50000/pair SIP subscribers: 50000/pair
Each FCCU pair can simultaneously 9000 trunks and 50000 subscribers, which is applicable to light-traffic offices. For example, it is required that the BHCA value of the FCCU module is less than 300 k.
H.323 subscribers: 25000/pair Maximum number of IP supermarke ts
90/pair
None
Interfaces
RS232 serial port
1
Used for commissioning; providing RJ45 sockets on the ; provided with hot-swappable protection.
Power consumpti on
NA
16 W
None
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-19
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
3.8.3 Indicators Figure 3-10 shows the front of the FCCU. FCCU
ALM RUN
COM
RST
OFFLINE
Figure 3-10 Front of the FCCU
Table 3-16 shows the meanings of indicators on the front of the FCCU. Table 3-16 Meanings of indicators on the front of the FCCU Indicator
ALM
Meaning
Fault indicator
Status description
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty. Flashing period for loading program: 0.25 second
RUN
Running indicator
Flashing period for normal running of the active board: 2 seconds Flashing period for normal running of the standby board: 4 seconds
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-20
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Indicator
OFFLINE
Chapter 3 Boards
Meaning
Plug-in indicator
Status description
When the board is plugged into a frame, if the blue indicator lights, it means that the board has ed the backplane and the ejector lever on the front can be pressed down to make the board fully inserted into the backplane. To pull the board out, pull the ejector lever on the front . When the blue indicator lights, it is allowed to pull the board out.
3.8.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
Caution:
Never use the reset button RST to reset the board.
Instead, execute the RST BRD command in the maintenance console to ensure that the reset reason information is saved in the BAM.
3.9 FCSU 3.9.1 Functions As the front board, the Fixed Calling Control and Signaling process Unit (FCSU) is used together with the back board EPII in pairs. The FCSU enables the following functions. The FCSU implements processing of call control and protocols, such as MTP3, ISUP, INAP, MG, H.248, H.323, SIP, R2, and DSS1. The FCSU also forwards the M3UA, IUA, and V5UA messages. Figure 3-11 shows the protocol stack of the FCSU.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-21
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
ISUP
INAP
Chapter 3 Boards
DSS1
V5.2
I U A
V 5 U A
MG
H.248
R2
SIP
H.323
TCAP SC
MTP3
M 3 U A
FCCU
MTP2
FCSU
EPII M 2 U A
M 3 U A
I U A
MG Stack
V 5 U A
H.248 Stack
SIP Stack
H.323 RAS
H.323 CALL
BSGI MTP1
SCTP
UDP
MSGI
UDP
T
IP
IP
Figure 3-11 Protocol stack of the FCSU
The FCSU generates and stores bills in its bill pool. Each FCSU can store up to 160,000 bills. The detailed bills are transmitted to iGWB through the shared resource bus for processing. The alarm information generated by the FCSU is reported to the SMUI through the shared resource bus.
Note:
The difference between the FCSU and the FCCU is that the FCSU can process narrowband signaling MTP2 messages while the FCCU cannot.
The FCSUs work in active/standby mode.
3.9.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of FCCU covers three aspects: Functions Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-22
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-17 Technical specifications of FCSU Category
Parameter
Call processing capability
Maximum number of trunks
Specification
SIP and subscribers: kBHCA/pair
H.323 500
MG and terminals: kBHCA/pair
H.248 300
Functions
BHCA is the acronym for Busy Hour Call Attempt.
9000/pair POTS subscribers: 50000/pair
Maximum number of subscribers
Remark
V5 subscribers: 50000/pair SIP subscribers: 50000/pair
Each FCSU pair can simultaneously 9000 trunks and 50000 subscribers, which is applicable to light-traffic offices. For example, it is required that the BHCA value of the FCSU module is less than 300 k.
H.323 subscribers: 25000/pair Maximum number of IP supermarket s
90/pair
None
Number of 64 kbit/s links
32
None
Number of 2 Mbit/s links
2
None
Interfaces
RS232 serial port
1
Used for debugging; providing RJ45 sockets on the ; provided with hot-swappable protection.
Power consumptio n
NA
26 W
None
3.9.3 Indicators Figure 3-12 shows the front of the FCSU.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-23
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
FCSU
ALM RUN
COM
RST
OFFLINE
Figure 3-12 Front of the FCSU
Table 3-18 shows the meanings of indicators on the front of the FCSU. Table 3-18 Meanings of indicators on the front of the FCSU Indicator
ALM
Meaning
Fault indicator
Status description
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty Flashing period for loading program: 0.25 second
RUN
OFFLINE
Running indicator
Plug-in indicator
Flashing period for normal running of the active board: 2 seconds Flashing period for normal running of the standby board: 4 seconds When the board is plugged into a frame, if the blue indicator lights, it means that the board has ed the backplane and the ejector lever on the front can be pressed down to make the board fully inserted into the backplane. While pulling the board out, pull the ejector lever on the front . When the blue indicator lights, it is allowed to pull the board out.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-24
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
3.9.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
Caution:
Never use the reset button RST to reset the board.
Instead, execute the RST BRD command in the maintenance console to ensure that the reset reason information is saved in the BAM.
3.10 HSCI 3.10.1 Functions The Hot-Swap and Control Unit (HSCI) is a back board. One pair of HSCIs is installed in the back slots 7 and 9 in each frame. It provides the following functions: Bridging between left and right shared resource buses, to ensure that the SMUIs in slots 6 and 8 can manage the front boards (except ALUI and UPWR) of the frame. Switching of Ethernet buses in the frame. Board hot swap control. Board power-on control. Providing two pairs of heartbeat detection interfaces for the SMUI and HSCI. Providing a 10/100 Mbit/s auto-sensing Ethernet connection between the active and the standby SMUI. Providing six external FE interfaces. The HSCIs work in active/standby mode.
3.10.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of HSCI covers two aspects: Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-19 Technical specifications of HSCI Category
Interfaces
Parameter
10/100-Mbit/s Ethernet interface
Specification
6
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-25
Remark
Provided on the fornt
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Category
Power consumption
Parameter
NA
Specification
16W
Remark
None
3.10.3 Indicators Figure 3-13 shows the front of the HSCI.
10/100BT1 10/100BT2
10/100BT3
10/100BT4 10/100BT5 10/100BT6
HSCI
DOMA DOMB
HUAWEI
Figure 3-13 Front of the HSCI
Table 3-20 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the HSCI.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-26
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-20 Meanings of indicators on the front of the HSCI Indicator
Meaning
Status description
DOMA
Bus domain indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the corresponding SMUI controls the shared resource buses in domain A.
DOMB
Bus domain indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the corresponding SMUI controls the shared resource buses in domain B.
LINK
Network port connection indicator
There are six LINK indicators. The indicators are always on as long as the physical connection is normal; otherwise they are off.
Network interface data flow indicator
There are six ACT indicators. When the indicator flashes, it indicates that some data is being received or transmitted The flashing frequency indicates the size of data flow. Fast flashing means the data flow is large, and slow flashing indicates that the data flow is small.
ACT
3.10.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers None
3.11 IFMI 3.11.1 Functions The IP Forward Module (IFMI) boards are the front boards in basic frame 0 and basic frame 1, and used together with the back board PFII in pairs. The IFMI is used to receive and transmit IP packets, process Media Access Control (MAC) layer messages, distribute IP messages and provide IP interfaces together with the BFII. The alarm information generated by the IFMI is reported to the SMUI through the shared resource bus. The IFMIs work in active/standby mode.
3.11.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of IFMI covers three aspects: Functions Interfaces Power consumption
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-27
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-21 Technical specifications of IFMI Category
Parameter
Specification
Remark
Functions
IP packet forwarding capability
32000 bit/s /pair
None
Interfaces
RS232 serial port
1
Used for commissioning; providing RJ45 sockets on the ; provided with hot-swappable protection.
Power consumpti on
NA
16W
None
3.11.3 Indicators Figure 3-14 shows the front of the IFMI. IFMI
LINK ACT
ALM RUN COM
RST
OFFLINE
Figure 3-14 Front of the IFMI
Table 3-22 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the IFMI.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-28
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-22 Meanings of indicators on the front of the IFMI Indicator
LINK
Meaning
Network interface connection indicator. Two available.
ACK
The indicator is always on when the physical connection is normal; otherwise it is off. are
Network interface data flow indicator. Two available.
ALM
Status description
are
Fault indicator
When the indicator flashes, it indicates that some data is being received or transmitted The flashing frequency indicates the size of the data flow. When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty Flashing period for loading program: 0.25 second
RUN
OFFLINE
Running indicator
Plug-in indicator
Flashing period for normal running: 0.5 second Flashing period for normal running of the standby board: 4 seconds When the board is plugged into a frame, if the blue indicator lights, it means that the board has ed the backplane and the ejector lever on the front can be pressed down to make the board fully inserted into the backplane. While pulling the board out, pull the ejector lever on the front . When the blue indicator lights, it is allowed to pull the board out.
3.11.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
3.12 SIUI 3.12.1 Functions The System Interface Unit (SIUI) is the back-insert interface board of the SMUI, and the SIUIs are installed in back slots 6 and 8 of the frame. Its functions are as follows. Providing
the
SMUI with
Ethernet interface. The
SIUI
is
configured
correspondingly to the SMUI one by one. Implementing level conversion for two asynchronous serial port signals from the front board, and providing physical interfaces for three asynchronous serial ports. Identifying frame ID through setting the DIP switches. The SIUIs work in active/standby mode. Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-29
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
3.12.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of SIUI covers two aspects: Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-23 Technical specifications of SIUI Category
Parameter
Interfaces
10/100-Mbps Ethernet interface
Specification
Remark
2
Connected with the HSCIs in slots 7 and 9.
Interfaces
RS485 interface
2
Implementing RS485 level conversion for the asynchronous serial port signals from the system boards and providing two physical interfaces for the asynchronous serial port to connect with the power distribution monitoring system.
Power consumpti on
NA
4W
None
3.12.3 Indicators Figure 3-15 shows the front of the SIUI.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-30
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
SIUI
10/100BT2
COM3+
COM3
10/100BT1
HD
HUAWEI
Figure 3-15 Front of the SIUI
3.12.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers The SIUI provides an 8-bit DIP switch S3, used for setting unit frame IDs. Table 3-24 shows the corresponding settings. Table 3-24 Table of SIUI switch corresponding to frame ID Switch bit Frame ID
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
1
on
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
2
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
on
3
on
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
4
on
on
on
on
on
off
on
on
5
on
on
on
on
on
off
on
off
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-31
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Switch bit
8
Frame ID
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
6
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
on
7
on
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
8
on
on
on
on
off
on
on
on
9
on
on
on
on
off
on
on
off
10
on
on
on
on
off
on
off
on
11
on
on
on
on
off
on
off
off
12
on
on
on
on
off
off
on
on
13
on
on
on
on
off
off
on
off
14
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
on
15
on
on
on
on
off
off
off
off
16
on
on
on
off
on
on
on
on
17
on
on
on
off
on
on
on
off
3.13 SMUI 3.13.1 Functions The System Management Unit (SMUI) is the main control board of a frame, and the units are installed in slots 6 and 8 in each OSTA frame. As the front boards, the SMUIs are used together with the back boards SIUIs in pairs, with the following functions. Configuring shared resource buses and managing their status. Managing all boards in the frame, reporting their status to BAM and controlling the status of the indicators on the front of the ALUI through serial port bus and shared resource bus. Loading and managing system program and data. The SMUIs work in active/standby mode.
3.13.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of SMUI covers two aspects: Interfaces Power consumption
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-32
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-25 Technical specifications of SMUI Category
Interfaces
Power consumpti on
Parameter
Specification
Remark
RS232 serial port
1
Used for commissioning; providing RJ45 sockets on the ; provided with hot-swappable protection.
RS422 master/slave serial port
1
Providing physical interfaces together with the SIUI.
Asynchronous serial port for TTL level
1
Used to connect with the monitoring board in the fan frame.
NA
14W
None
3.13.3 Indicators Figure 3-16 shows the front of the SMUI. SMUI
LINK ACT
RST
ALM RUN
COM
DOMA DOMB
HUAWEI
Figure 3-16 Front of the SMUI
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-33
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-26 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the SMUI. Table 3-26 Meanings of indicators on the front of the SMUI Indicator
Meaning
Status description
LINK
Network port connection indicator
The indicator is always on when the physical connection is normal; otherwise it is off.
ACT
Network port data flow indicator
When the indicator flashes, it indicates that some data is being received or transmitted The flashing frequency indicates the size of the data flow.
ALM
Fault indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty Flashing period for loading program: 0.25 second
RUN
Running indicator
Flashing period for normal running of the active board: 2 seconds Flashing period for normal running of the standby board: 4 seconds
DOMA
Bus domain indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the SMUI in domain A controls the shared resource buses.
DOMB
Bus domain indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the SMUI in domain B controls the shared resource buses.
3.13.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
3.14 MRCA 3.14.1 Functions The Media Resource Control Unit (MRCA) is the front board in the resource expansion frame, and used in pair with the back board MRIA. Each MRCA can function as independent media resource server. The MRCA processes the audio signals in real time. It collects and generates DTMF signals, plays and records audio clips and provides multi-party conference function. The MRCAs work in load sharing mode.
3.14.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of MRCA covers three aspects: Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-34
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Functions Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-27 Technical specifications of MRCA Category
Parameter
Specification
Functions
Processing capacity
240 channels/board
Interfaces
RS232 serial port
1
Power consumption
None
40 W
3.14.3 Indicators Figure 3-17 shows the front of the MRCA. MRCA
ALM RUN
COM
RST
OFFLINE
Figure 3-17 Front of the MRCA
Table 3-28 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the MRCA. Table 3-28 Meanings of indicators on the front of the MRCA Indicator
ALM
Meaning
Fault indicator
Status description
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-35
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Indicator
Chapter 3 Boards
Meaning
Status description
Flashing period for loading program: 0.25 second RUN
OFFLINE
Running indicator
Plug-in indicator
Flashing period for normal running of the active board: 2 seconds Flashing period for normal running of the standby board: 4 seconds When the board is plugged into a frame, if the blue indicator lights, it means that the board has ed the backplane and the ejector lever on the front can be pressed down to make the board fully inserted into the backplane. When pulling the board out, pull the ejector lever on the front . When the blue indicator lights, it is allowed to pull the board out.
3.14.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers None
3.15 MRIA 3.15.1 Functions The Media Resource Interface Unit (MRIA) is the back board of the MRCA, providing 10/100-Mbps interface for the external media streams.
3.15.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of MRIA covers three aspects: Functions Interfaces Power consumption Table 3-29 Technical specifications of MRIA Category
Parameter
Specification
Remark
Functions
10/100-Mbit/s Ethernet interface
2
Used to transfer media streams.
Interfaces
RS232 port
2
None
Power consumption
NA
2W
None
serial
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-36
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
3.15.3 Indicators Figure 3-18 shows the front of the MRIA.
10/100BT
10/100 BASE-T
COM
10/100BT
10/100 BASE-T
COM
MRIA
HUAWEI
Figure 3-18 Front of the MRIA
On the MRIA, there are two groups of interfaces, and each group has three interfaces: the upper interface is the serial port for commissioning, the middle one is the 10/100 Mbit/s network interface for stream transmission and the lower one is reserved for future use.
3.15.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers None
3.16 MSGI 3.16.1 Functions The Multimedia Signaling Gateway Unit (MSGI) processes the following protocols: Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-37
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
UDP T H.323 (including H.323 RAS and H.323 Call Signaling) SIP Figure 3-19 shows the protocol stack of the MSGI. FCCU/FCSU H.323
H.323 RAS SIP Stack
H.323 CALL
UDP
T
MSGI
IP
MAC IFMI
LAN Driver BFII
Figure 3-19 Protocol stack of the MSGI
The MSGIs work in active/standby mode. The alarm information generated by the MSGI is reported to the SMUI through the shared resource bus.
Note:
When the BHCA of the system is less than 400,000 or the number of equivalent subscribers is less than 50,000, it is not necessary to configure the MSGI. The configured IFMIs can provide all features of MSGI.
3.16.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of MSGI covers three aspects: Functions Interfaces
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-38
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Power consumption Table 3-30 Technical specifications of MSGI Category
Parameter
Specification
SIP
1000 PPS
H.323 CALL Signaling
866 PPS
H.323 RAS
1111 PPS
Interfaces
RS232 serial port
1
Power consumption
NA
16W
Functions
3.16.3 Indicators Figure 3-20 shows the front of the MSGI.
MSGI
ALM RUN
COM
RST
OFFLINE
Figure 3-20 Front of the MSGI
Table 3-31 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the MSGI.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-39
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-31 Meanings of indicators on the front of the MSGI Indicator
ALM
Meaning
Fault indicator
Status description
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the board is reset or faulty Flashing period for loading program: 0.25 second
RUN
OFFLINE
Running indicator
Plug-in indicator
Flashing period for normal running of the active board: 2 seconds Flashing period for normal running of the standby board: 4 seconds When the board is plugged into a frame, if the blue indicator lights, it means that the board has ed the backplane and the ejector lever on the front can be pressed down to make the board fully inserted into the backplane. While pulling the board out, pull the ejector lever on the front . When the blue indicator lights, it is allowed to pull the board out.
3.16.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers There is one reset button RST used to reset the board.
3.17 UPWR 3.17.1 Functions The Universal Power (UPWR) can be a front board or a back board. It provides power supply for all the other boards in the frame. Each UPWR occupies two slots—in front slots 17 and 18 or back slots 19 and 20 of each frame. The ALUI collects the information of the UPWR through the serial cable embedded in the backplane, and drives the indicators on the ALUI to indicate the working status of the UPWR. The UPWR adopts the 2+2 backup working mode.
3.17.2 Technical Specifications The technical specifications of ALUI covers three aspects: Functions Interfaces Power consumption
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-40
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-32 Technical specifications of ALUI Category
Specification
Remark
Input voltage
From –76 V to –36 V
The output currents for the voltages are 50 A, 40 A, 8 A and 4 A respectively.
Output voltage
3.3V, 5V, ±12V
None
Interfaces
Indication interface for power output failure and in-position power unit
1
None
Power consumpti on
NA
20W
None
Voltage
Parameter
3.17.3 Indicators Figure 3-21 shows the front of the UPWR. UPW R
ALM RU N
HUAW EI
Figure 3-21 Front of the UPWR
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-41
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 3 Boards
Table 3-33 shows the meanings of the indicators on the front of the UPWR. Table 3-33 Meanings of indicators on the front of the UPWR Indicator
Meaning
Status description
ALM
Power fault indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the power module is in faulty status.
RUN
Power running indicator
When the indicator lights, it indicates that the power module works normally.
3.17.4 DIP Switches and Jumpers None
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3-42
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Chapter 4 Cables 4.1 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable Power cables are used to supply power to a cabinet and its components. The protection grounding cables of various components in a cabinet are interconnected through the grounding bars in the cabinet. Through the protection grounding cables of the cabinet, the grounding bars are connected to the protection ground (PGND) of the DC power distribution cabinet, which is connected with the protection grounding bus in the equipment room. In addition, all cabinets are interconnected by protection grounding cables as an equipotential system. The power cables and protection grounding cables of a cabinet and its components include the following: z
Input power cable and protection grounding cable for cabinet
z
Protection grounding cable for power distribution frame (connected before delivery)
z
Power cable and protection grounding cable for service frame
z
Power cable and protection grounding cable for KVMS switcher
z
Power cable and protection grounding cable for local area network (LAN) Switch
z
Power cable and protection grounding cable for hard disk array (only when iGWB uses IBM server)
z
Power cable and protection grounding cable for iGateway Bill (iGWB)/background module (BAM) server
z
Power cable and protection grounding cable for media resource server (MRS)
z
Protection grounding cable for interconnection of grounding bars between adjacent cabinets
z
Protection grounding cable for cabinet body
Among these cables, the input power cables for cabinets connect SoftX3000 cabinets and the direct current (DC) power distribution cabinet in the equipment room, while the other power cables connect the output terminals of the power distribution cabinet and the input terminals of the corresponding components and frames.
4.1.1 Input Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for Cabinet The input power cables of each SoftX3000 cabinet include two –48 V cables (blue) and two backhaul ground (BGND) cables (black), equipped with one PGND cable (yellow). Refer to Table 4-1 for the cross-sectional area of these cables.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-1
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Table 4-1 Cross-sectional area of power cables and protection grounding cables between DC power distribution cabinet and SoftX3000 cabinets Name
Specifications 2
–48 V power cable (blue)
25 mm –copper core wire–two-channel
BGND cable (black)
25 mm –copper core wire–two-channel
PGND cable (yellow or olivine)
25 mm –copper core wire
2 2
For a power cable, the end connected to the input terminal of the power distribution frame is a cold end terminal (as shown in Figure 4-1), and the other end is usually an OT terminal. The two ends of a PGND cable use OT terminals, as shown in Figure 4-2. OT terminals should be connected after completion of cabling on site. Refer to Appendix D of U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Installation Manual–Hardware Installation for the connection method.
Figure 4-1 Schematic diagram of a cold end terminal
Figure 4-2 Schematic diagram of an OT terminal
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-2
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Note: If the cross-sectional area of the existing cables does not meet the design requirement, you can connect two or more cables in parallel for use. For example, if 240-mm2 power cables are required but only 120-mm2 power cables are available, you can connect two 120-mm2 power cables to be used as one cable.
4.1.2 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cables for Service Frame Each service frame has one input power cable when single power supply is adopted, and has two input power cables when dual power supplies are adopted. The power cables that are connected to the service frames in different locations have different lengths. Figure 4-3 shows the appearance of a power cable of a service frame.
Figure 4-3 Appearance of a power cable for a service frame The model of such power cable is UL1015, and its cross-sectional area is 10 American Wire Gauge (AWG, about 5.3 mm2). The end connecting to a power distribution frame has two cold end terminals (X2, X4), and the other end connecting to a service frame has two OT terminals (X1, X3). The blue cable is –48 V cable, and the black one is BGND cable. Each service frame is equipped with two olivine 10-AWG protection grounding cables, with both ends using OT terminals for connecting the two grounding terminals of a service frame to the grounding bars at both sides of a cabinet.
4.1.3 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for KVMS Switcher The power cables for a KVMS switcher are made of 16-AWG UL1015 wires (with the cross-sectional area about 1.3 mm2). One end connected to a power distribution frame has two cold end terminals and the other end for power input has two OT terminals. The blue cable is –48 V cable, and the black one is GND cable. See Figure 4-4 for the appearance of such power cable.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-3
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Figure 4-4 Appearance of a KVMS power cable KVMS is equipped with an olivine 14-AWG protection grounding cable (with the cross-sectional area about 2.1 mm2) for connecting the grounding terminals of KVMS with the grounding bars at both sides of a cabinet. See Figure 4-5 for the appearance of the protection grounding cable of KVMS. The UT terminal connects to the KVMS grounding point, and the OT terminal connects to the grounding bar.
Figure 4-5 Appearance of a KVMS protection grounding cable
4.1.4 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for LAN Switch The power cables for LAN Switch are made of 16-AWG UL1015 wires, and both ends are cold end terminals. See Figure 4-6 for the appearance of such power cable.
Figure 4-6 Appearance of a power cable of LAN Switch The protection grounding cable for LAN Switch uses 14-AWG UL1015 wire, with both ends being OT terminals, one end of which is connected to the grounding terminal on the back of a LAN Switch and the other end is grounded locally.
4.1.5 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for HP Server The input power socket is at the very right side of the back of HP server. It supplies dual power with two power modules. The power cable and protection grounding cable are both UL1015 cable with cross-sectional area of 12 AWG (about 3.3 mm2). Figure 4-7 shows the appearance. The cables connect the server with a female connector 3V3 (x1) at one end; at the other end are power cables and protection grounding cables. The power cables use two cold end terminals (x3, x4), with blue cables being -48V cables, and black cables being GND cables. The olivine protection grounding cables use OT terminals (x2) at both ends.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-4
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
(1) Female connector 3V3
Chapter 4 Cables
(2) OT terminal
(3) Cold end terminal
(4)Main label
Figure 4-7 Appearance of power cables and protection grounding cables for HP server
4.1.6 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for IBM Server The power cables for iGWB and BAM server are made of 16-AWG UL1015 wires (with the cross-sectional area about 1.3 mm2). The end connected to a power distribution frame is a cold end terminal, and the power input end is a UT terminal. The grounding cable connects the server by UT terminal and connects the grounding busbar by OT terminal. The blue cable is –48 V cable, and the black one is GND cable. Figure 4-8 shows the appearance of such cable.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-5
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Figure 4-8 Appearance of a power cables and protection grounding cables for IBM Server
4.1.7 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for Hard Disk Array When iGWB uses IBM server, you need to configure IBM EXP400 disk array, which can supply dual power with two power modules. The power cable and protection grounding cable for hard disk array are provided by the manufacturer of hard disk array. The cable color definition is different from Huawei’s specification. The end connected to a power distribution frame is a cold end terminal, on which the blue cable is labeled “–48V”, the brown end is labeled “GND”, and the olivine one is labeled “PGND”. The appearance of the cables is shown in Figure 4-9.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-6
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Figure 4-9 Appearance of power cables and grounding cables for hard disk array
4.1.8 Power Cable and Protection Grounding Cable for MRS The MRS is installed in the MRS cabinet independently with dual power supplies. The cross-sectional area of its power cable is AWG10. See Figure 4-10 for the appearance of the power cable.
Figure 4-10 Appearance of power cables of MRS The PGND cable is an olivine AWG10 cable, with both ends being OT terminals. The power cable and protection grounding cable are both 4.27 m in length.
4.1.9 Other Protection Grounding Cables I. Protection Grounding Cables Between SoftX3000 Cabinets The protection grounding cables between adjacent SoftX3000 cabinets are interconnected on the upper, middle, and lower points of a grounding bar. The protection grounding cable is UL1015 cable with cross-sectional area of 10 AWG, in total length of 300 mm, and with OT terminals at both ends.
II. Protection Grounding Cables for Cabinet Doors The protection grounding cables for doors are used to connect the grounding terminals on the base of a cabinet and the front and back doors as well as side s of the cabinet. The protection grounding cable is UL1015 cable with cross-sectional area of 10 AWG and OT terminals at both ends. One such cable is configured for each door. The protection grounding cables for the front and back doors are 300 mm long, and those for the side s are 250 mm long.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-7
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
III. Protection Grounding Cables for Power Distribution Frames (Connected before Delivery) The protection grounding cable for a power distribution frame is used to connect the grounding terminal of the power distribution frame and the grounding bar of a cabinet. The protection grounding cable is UL1015 cable with cross-sectional area of 10 AWG, in total length of 250 mm, and with OT terminals at both ends.
IV. Protection Grounding Cables from Grounding Bar to Cabinet Body (Connected before Delivery) This protection grounding cable is used to connect the grounding terminal at the top or bottom of a cabinet and the grounding bar of the cabinet. The protection grounding cable is ZRA VV cable with cross-sectional area of 10 mm2, in total length of 300 mm, and with OT terminals at both ends.
4.2 Internal Signal Cable The internal signal cables that need to be installed on site include the following: z
Straight through cable
z
FE signal cable
z
Serial port cable between iGWB servers
z
Data cable between iGWB server and hard disk array (only when iGWB uses IBM server)
z
Server/switcher cable
z
Serial port cable for monitoring power distribution frame
z
Internal clock cable (optional)
4.2.1 Straight Through Cable I. Classification and Function of Straight Through Cable SoftX3000 uses the following straight through cables: z
Straight through cable between LAN Switches
To ensure that LAN Switches work in dual backup mode, the two S3528G LAN Switches in the integrated configuration cabinet need to be interconnected through three straight through cables in view of security. The straight through cable is used to transmit heartbeat detection signals so as to complete dual backup of data. z
Straight through cable between iGWB/BAM and LAN Switch
The integrated configuration cabinet has three servers: two iGWB servers and one BAM server. Each server uses two straight through cables to connect with the active and standby LAN Switches. z
Straight through cable between board in service frame and LAN Switch
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-8
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
The ports marked 10/100BT6 at the uppermost position of the active and standby HSCIs are connected to the active and standby LAN Switches respectively through straight through cables, implementing the communication between the service processing subsystem and BAM, and the interconnection between the service processing frames. Straight through cable between MRS and LAN Switch
z
The communication between iGWB/BAM, boards in a service frame, and MRS is implemented through LAN Switch. FE signal cable between HSCI and SIUI
z
FE signal cable is straight through cable, used to connect the HSCI (a bridge board) and the SIUI (a back board of the system board).
II. Appearance of Straight Through Cable Figure 4-11 shows the appearance of a straight through cable. Its both ends are shielded crystal connectors, and category-5 shielded twisted pair is used as the cable material.
Figure 4-11 Appearance of a straight through cable
III. Connection of Straight Through Cable See Table 4-2 for the cable connections at both ends. Table 4-2 Connections of straight through cables X1
X2
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
Remark A twisted pair
A twisted pair
A twisted pair
A twisted pair
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-9
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Note: Both the BAM server and emergency workstation are connected to the HUB through straight through cables, so that the emergency workstation can back up the data in the BAM periodically. In addition, you need to lay two straight through cables between the emergency workstation and LAN Switches in advance. When the BAM is working normally, these two cables are disconnected with LAN Switches. However, once the BAM is faulty, immediately connect these two cables with the active and standby LAN Switches respectively to make the emergency workstation take over the job of the BAM.
4.2.2 Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers (HP Server) I. Functions of Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers (HP Server) To ensure the dual backup working mode and security of the iGWB servers, it is required to connect the two iGWB servers in the integrated configuration cabinet through a serial port cable, which forms the second heartbeat signal path between the active and standby iGWBs.
Note： The active and standby iGWB servers connect to the bill console or NMS device through the HUB. The external network cable connecting to the HUB acts as the first heartbeat signal path between the active and standby iGWB servers.
II. Appearance and Architecture of Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers The serial port cable is a four-core round shielded serial port cable, with the cross-sectional area of 26 AWG and DB9 female connector at both ends. Figure 4-12 shows the appearance.
(1)Main label
Figure 4-12 Appearance of a serial port cable connecting two iGWBs (HP server)
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-10
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
III. Connections of Serial Port Cables Between HP Servers Table 4-3 shows the connections of serial port cables between HP servers. Table 4-3 Connections of serial port cables between HP servers X1
X2
Color
2
3
Red
3
2
Yellow
5
5
Black
4.2.3 Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers (IBM Server) I. Functions of Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers To ensure the dual backup working mode and security of the iGWB servers, it is required to connect the two iGWB servers in the integrated configuration cabinet through a serial port cable, which forms the second heartbeat signal path between the active and standby iGWBs.
Note: The active and standby iGWB servers connect to the bill console or NMS device through the HUB. The external network cable connecting to the HUB acts as the first heartbeat signal path between the active and standby iGWB servers.
II. Appearance and Architecture of Serial Port Cable Between iGWB Servers This serial port cable is an enhanced C5 eight-core shielded twisted-pair cable, with the cross-sectional area of 24 AWG and RJ45 crystal connectors at both ends. See Figure 4-13 for its appearance. Table 4-4 illustrates the cable connection relations at both ends.
(1) Main label
Figure 4-13 Appearance of a serial port cable connecting two iGWBs
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-11
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Table 4-4 Connections of serial port cables between IBM servers X1
X2
1
8
2
7
3
6
4
4
5
5
6
3
7
2
8
1
4.2.4 Data Cable Between iGWB Server and Hard Disk Array I. Functions of Data Cable Between iGWB Server and Hard Disk Array When iGWB uses IBM server, you need to configure IBM EXP400 disk array. Two SCSI data cables between two iGWB servers and the hard disk array are provided by the manufacturer of the hard disk array. One end of the data cable connects with the SCSI slot on an iGWB server, and the other end connects to the SCSI socket on the upper part of the hard disk array.
II. Appearance and Architecture of Data Cable Between iGWB Server and Hard Disk Array The SCSI data cable adopts 68-pin and very high density connector interface (VHDCI) connectors, as shown in Figure 4-14.
Figure 4-14 Appearance of an SCSI data cable
4.2.5 Server/Switcher Cable I. Functions of Server/Switcher Cable Server/switcher cables include keyboard cable, mouse cable, and display cable, which are delivered together with a server and used to connect the KVMS and iGWB/BAM server. The KVMS switches the keyboard signals, mouse signals, and video signals connected with different servers.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-12
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
II. Appearance and Architecture of Server/Switcher Cable Keyboard and mouse cables use PS/2 connectors. See Figure 4-15 for its appearance.
Figure 4-15 Appearance of keyboard and mouse signal cables Both ends of a display signal cable use DB15 male connectors, as shown in Figure 4-16.
Figure 4-16 Appearance of a display signal cable
4.2.6 Serial Port Cable for Monitoring Power Distribution Frame I. Functions of Serial Port Cable for Monitoring Power Distribution Frame The system management unit (SMUI) in a service frame is responsible for monitoring the signals of a power distribution frame. On the monitor board of the power distribution frame, there are two RS485 serial ports serving as the active and standby power monitor ports, which are connected with the active and standby monitor ports of the SIUI of the service frame through the serial port cables to send the monitor signals of the power distribution frame to the BAM. Each cabinet is connected with two serial port cables for monitoring.
II. Appearance and Architecture of Serial Port Cable for Monitoring Power Distribution Frame Both ends of a monitor cable are shielded crystal connectors with lockers for ensuring reliable connections, and category-5 shielded twisted pair is adopted as cable material. See Figure 4-17 for the appearance of the cable, and Figure 4-17 for the connection relations.
Figure 4-17 Appearance of a serial port cable for monitoring power distribution frame Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-13
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
III. Connection of Serial Port Cable for Monitoring Power Distribution Frame Table 4-5 Connections of serial port cable for monitoring the PDF Connector 1
Connector 2
Name of signal
X1.1
X2.1
TX+
X1.2
X2.2
TX-
X1.4
X2.4
RX+
X1.5
X2.5
RX-
Wire pair A twisted pair
A twisted pair
4.2.7 Internal Clock Cable I. Classification of Clock Cables The clock cables of SoftX3000 can be divided into two types: internal clock cable and external clock cable. The internal clock cable is used to connect the EPII and CKII boards, and the external clock cable is used to connect the CKII board and the building integrated timing supply system (BITS) device, as shown in Figure 4-18. External clock cable
BITS
BITS
2MHz clock cable
C K I I
C K I I
Active
8kHz clock cable
E P I I
E P I I
Active Standby
Active
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
E P I I
The basic frame configured with CKIIs in an integrated configuration cabinet
Active Active Standby Standby
8kHz clock cable
... Service frames without CKIIs
E P I I
E P I I
Active Standby
Figure 4-18 Connection relations of clock cables
II. Internal Clock Cable There are two kinds of internal clock cables: 2-MHz clock cable and 8-kHz clock cable. The 2-MHz clock cable imports synchronous clock signals from the active EPII to the CKII. The 8-kHz clock cable provides 8-kHz clock signals to the frames without CKIIs.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-14
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
III. Appearance and Architecture of Internal Clock Cable The 2-MHz clock cable is double-layer shielded coaxial cable and its two shielding layers are connected. Both ends use 75-ohm sub-miniature B (SMB) connectors. Figure 4-19 shows its appearance.
Figure 4-19 Appearance of a 2-MHz clock cable The 8-kHz clock cable is twisted pair with shielded crystal connectors at both ends. Its appearance is the same as a straight through cable, as shown in Figure 4-11.
IV. Connections of Internal Clock Cable Table 4-6 shows the connections of an 8-kHz clock cable. Table 4-6 Connections of a 8-kHz clock cable Connector 1
Connector 2
X1.1
X2.1
X1.2
X2.2
Wire pair A twisted pair
4.3 External Signal Cable The external signal cables of SoftX3000 include: z
Trunk cable
z
External clock cable
z
External network cable
The external clock cable and trunk cable are configured based on the actual networking.
4.3.1 Trunk Cable between SoftX3000 and Digital Distribution Frame The trunk cables used in SoftX3000 are of two types: 75-ohm E1 cable and 120-ohm E1 cable. Both types adopt DB50 high-density connectors with lockers for fixing.
I. 75-ohm E1 Cable The 75-ohm E1 cable is eight-core coaxial cable with braided shielding layer and jacket. Each DB50 connector provides two eight-core cables, and the shielding layer is spliced with the metal envelop of the DB connector. Each trunk cable is used to transmit eight channels of E1 signals. Figure 4-20 shows the appearance of a 75-ohm E1 trunk cable.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-15
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
1) DB50 male connector
2) Main label
3) Label
4) Small label
Figure 4-20 Appearance of a 75-ohm trunk cable The wire order is distinguished by the digits on the cores. Table 4-7 shows the pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable connector.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-16
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Table 4-7 Pin assignment of the 75-ohm E1 trunk cable connector Wire No. W2.8
W2.7
W2.6
W2.5
W2.4
W2.3
W2.2
W2.1
Pin No.
Signal
X0.2
X1.Tip
X0.3
X1.Ring
X0.5
X2.Tip
X0.6
X2.Ring
X0.8
X3.Tip
X0.9
X3.Ring
X0.11
X4.Tip
X0.12
X4.Ring
X0.14
X5.Tip
X0.15
X5.Ring
X0.17
X6.Tip
X0.18
X6.Ring
X0.20
X7.Tip
X0.21
X7.Ring
X0.23
X8.Tip
X0.24
X8.Ring
Channel No. CHAN7 Tx
CHAN7 Rx
CHAN6 Tx
CHAN6 Rx
CHAN5 Tx
CHAN5 Rx
CHAN4 Tx
CHAN4 Rx
Wire No. W1.8
W1.7
W1.6
W1.5
W1.4
W1.3
W1.2
W1.1
Pin No.
Signal
X0.27
X9.Tip
X0.28
X9.Ring
X0.30
X10.Tip
X0.31
X10.Ring
X0.33
X11.Tip
X0.34
X11.Ring
X0.36
X12.Tip
X0.37
X12.Ring
X0.39
X13.Tip
X0.40
X13.Ring
X0.42
X14.Tip
X0.43
X14.Ring
X0.45
X15.Tip
X0.46
X15.Ring
X0.48
X16.Tip
X0.49
X16.Ring
Channel No. CHAN3 Tx
CHAN3 Rx
CHAN2 Tx
CHAN2 Rx
CHAN1 Tx
CHAN1 Rx
CHAN0 Tx
CHAN0 Rx
II. 120-ohm E1 Cable The 120-ohm E1 cable is composed of eight pairs of twisted pairs with braided shielding layer and jacket. Each DB50 connector provides two 8-pair twisted pairs, and the shielding layer is spliced with the metal envelop of the DB connector. Each trunk cable is used to transmit eight channels of E1 signals. Figure 4-21 shows the appearance of a 120-ohm E1 trunk cable.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-17
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Figure 4-21 Appearance of a 120-ohm trunk cable The wire order is distinguished by the digits on the cores. Table 4-8 shows the pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable connector.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-18
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Table 4-8 Pin assignment of the 120-ohm E1 trunk cable connector Wire pair No. 8
7
6
5
4
3
Pin No.
Signal
Remark
Channel No.
Wire pair No.
Pin No.
Signal
Remark
X0.27
TxTip7
Red core
Green core
X0.28
TxRing7
Green core
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.29
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.5
RxTip7
Red core
X0.30
RxTip7
Red core
X0.6
RxRing7
Orange core
X0.31
RxRing7
Orange core
X0.7
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.32
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.8
TxTip6
Red core
X0.33
TxTip6
Red core
X0.9
TxRing6
Blue core
X0.34
TxRing6
Blue core
X0.10
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.35
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.11
RxTip6
White core
X0.36
RxTip6
White core
X0.12
RxRing6
Gray core
X0.37
RxRing6
Gray core
X0.13
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.38
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.14
TxTip5
White core
X0.39
TxTip5
White core
X0.15
TxRing5
Brown core
X0.40
TxRing5
Brown core
X0.16
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.41
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.17
RxTip5
White core
X0.42
RxTip5
White core
X0.18
RxRing5
Green core
X0.43
RxRing5
Green core
X0.2
TxTip7
Red core
X0.3
TxRing7
X0.4
8
CHAN7 7
6
CHAN6 5
CHAN5
4
3
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-19
Channel No.
CHAN3
CHAN2
CHAN1
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Wire pair No.
2
1
Pin No.
Signal
Chapter 4 Cables
Remark
X0.19
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.20
TxTip4
White core
X0.21
TxRing4
X0.22
Channel No.
Wire pair No.
Pin No.
Signal
Remark
X0.44
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.45
TxTip4
White core
Orange core
X0.46
TxRing4
Orange core
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.47
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.23
RxTip4
White core
X0.48
RxTip4
White core
X0.24
RxRing4
Blue core
X0.49
RxRing4
Blue core
X0.25
PGND
Braided shielding layer
X0.50
PGND
Braided shielding layer
2
CHAN4 1
Channel No.
CHAN0
4.3.2 Clock Signal Cable between SoftX3000 and BITS Device External clock cables are 75-ohm coaxial cables in the same model as the internal 2-MHz clock cable , used to connect the active and standby CKIIs with the BITS device. Figure 4-19 shows its appearance.
4.3.3 External Network Cables of SoftX3000 The external network cables are used to connect SoftX3000 with external network devices, and the external network ports on the SoftX3000 are provided by the corresponding back interface boards. The MRS is also connected to SoftX3000 through external networking devices. The active and standby media resource interface boards (MRIAs) in SoftX3000 or the media processor cards (MPCs) and shelf control boards (SCCs) in MRS6000C are connected to the external routers or LAN Switches through the external network cables. The active and standby iGWB servers connect to the bill console or NMS device through the HUB. The external network cable connecting to the HUB acts as the first heartbeat signal path between the active and standby iGWB servers. The external network cables are category-5 unshielded or shielded crossover network cables with RJ45 connectors. See Figure 4-11 for the appearance of a crossover network cable, and Table 4-9 for its connection relations.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-20
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Chapter 4 Cables
Table 4-9 Connections of a crossover network cable X1
X2
1
3
2
6
3
1
4
4
5
5
6
2
7
7
8
8
Remark A twisted pair
A twisted pair
A twisted pair
A twisted pair
Huawei Technologies Proprietary 4-21
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Appendix A Appendix
Appendix A Appendix Abbreviation
Full name
A ALUI
Alarm Unit
B BAM
Backend istration Module
BFII
Back insert FE Interface unit
BHCA
Busy Hour Call Attempt
BITS
Building Integrated Timing Supply
BSGI
Broadband Signaling Gateway
C CDBI
Central Database Board
CKII
Clock Interface Unit
U
Central Processing Unit
D DPC
Destination Point Code
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
E EPII
E1_Pool Interface unit
ESM
Enclosure Services Module
F FCCU
Fixed Calling Control Unit
FCSU
Fixed Calling control and Signaling process Unit
FE
Fast Ethernet
FTAM
File Transfer Access and Management Protocol
FTP
File Transfer Protocol
G GE
Gigabit Ethernet
H H.248
H.248/MECAMGO protocol
HSCI
Hot-Swap and Control unit
Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-1
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Appendix A Appendix
Abbreviation
Full name
I IEC 297
International Electrotechnical Commission 297
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IFMI
IP Forward Module
iGWB
Integrated Gateway Billing
ISUP
Integrated Services Digital Network Part/ISDN Part
IUA
ISDN Q.921- Adaptation Layer
K KVMS
Keyboard & Video & Mouse & Switcher
M M2UA
Message Transfer Part 2 (MTP2) – Adaptation Layer
M3UA
Message Transfer Part 3 (MTP3) – Adaptation Layer
MAC
Media Access Control
MG
Media Gateway Control Protocol
MPC
Media Processor Card
MRCA
Media Resource Control Adapter
MRIA
Media Resource Interface Adapter
MRS
Media Resource Server
MSGI
Multimedia Signaling Gateway unit
N NI
Network Indication
O OMC
Operation and Maintenance Center
OPC
Originating Point Code
OSTA
Open Standards Telecom Architecture platform
P PCI
Peripheral Component Interconnect
POTS
Plain Old Telephone Service
PPS
Packets Percent Second
PSTN
Public Switched Telephone Network
R RAS
Remote Access Server
RPM
Rotation per minute Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-2
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Appendix A Appendix
Abbreviation
Full name
S SCC
Shelf Control Card
SCSI
Small Computer Systems Interface
SCTP
Signaling Control Transmission Protocol
SIP
Session Initiation Protocol
SIUI
System Interface Unit
SMUI
System Management Unit
T T
Transport Control Protocol
TDM
Time Division Multiplex
U UDP
Datagram Protocol
UL
Underwriter Laboratories
UPWR
Universal Power
V V5UA
V5.2- Adaptation Layer
W WDMC
power Distribution Monitor & Control unit
WOPB
Overvoltage Protection Board
WOTB
Overvoltage Protection Transfer Board
WSTB
Signals Transfer Board
Huawei Technologies Proprietary A-3
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Index
Index Numerics
F
120-ohm E1 cable, 4-17
fiber management tray (FMT), 1-39
75-ohm E1 cable, 4-15
H
A
hard disk array, 1-40
air deflector, 1-33
heat dissipation, 2-3
alarm box, 1-51 American Wire Gauge (AWG), 4-3
I
B
iGWB, 1-44, 1-47 internal signal cable, 4-8
board
data cable, 4-8
ALUI, 3-3
FE signal cable, 4-8
back board, 3-1
internal clock cable, 4-8
backplane, 3-1
serial port cable, 4-8
BFII, 3-6
straight through cable, 4-8
BSGI, 3-7
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), 1-6
CDBI, 3-11
K
CKII, 3-13 EPII, 3-15
KVM/LCD. See KVMS
FCCU, 3-17
KVMS, 1-34
front board, 3-1 HSCI, 3-25
L
IFMI, 3-27
LAN Switch, 1-36
MRCA, 3-34 MRIA, 3-36
N
MSGI, 3-37 SIUI, 3-29
N68-22 cabinet, 1-2
SMUI, 3-32
N800 floor holder, 1-5
UPWR, 3-40
floor holder-slide rail assemblies, 1-5
C
Height range, 1-5 holder fixing component, 1-5
cabling trough, 1-39
side rail, 1-5
E
O
external signal cable, 4-15
open standard telecom architecture (OSTA), 2-1
Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-1
Hardware Description Manual U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System
Index
P
KVMS, 1-35 LAN Switch, 1-38
power distribution frame (PDF), 1-26
N68-22 cabinet, 1-6 power distribution frame, 1-31
S
workstation, 1-50
SoftX3000 cabinet integrated configuration cabinet, 1-7
U
MRS cabinet, 1-13
universal alarm box. See alarm box
service processing cabinet, 1-11
W
T
WDMB, 1-27
technical specifications
workstation, 1-50
BAM, 1-49
emergency workstation \i, 1-50
hard disk array, 1-43
WSTB, 1-27
iGWB, 1-49
i.
Huawei Technologies Proprietary i-2
Related Documents 3h463d
Hardware Description 2x6r4u
May 2020 25
Bbu3900 Hardware Description (v100_03) 6o4y5l
November 2019 46
Aau3911 Hardware Description 1gx38
June 2020 2
Aau3902 Hardware Description 1s1067
October 2019 45
Alcatel Bts Hardware Description 6q145g
October 2019 66More Documents from "Hassaan Shuja" 623u36
Softx3000 Hardware Description Manual 2d6u5g
March 2023 0
Lwr Manual Updated Upto Cs 16.pdf 4a711x
December 2019 62
Moving Loads(ild) 3y4r2y
October 2019 74
Training Report From Hal Lucknow g2v3
December 2021 0
B.com(gen) I, Ii,iii Structure And Syllabus For 2008-091 1m294d
December 2019 40